Quarterlytics / Industrials / Staffing & Employment Services / Staffing 360 Solutions

Staffing 360 Solutions

staf · LSE Industrials
Claim this profile
Ticker staf
Exchange LSE
Sector Industrials
Industry Staffing & Employment Services
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · Staffing 360 Solutions
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Contents Generation – Section

Contents Generation – Page

S

t

a

f

f

l

i

n

e

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

2

1

Providing  
workforce  
solutions

Annual Report  
and Accounts

2021

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Who we are

Staffline is one  
of the UK and 
Ireland’s leading 
Recruitment  
and Training 
providers.

Our purpose
Enabling the future of 
work by developing 
and deploying a highly 
flexible, robust and 
skilled workforce.

Our vision
To be a world class 
recruitment and 
training group, the 
clear market leader 
and trusted partner 
known for excellent 
service and integrity, 
driven forward by 
digital innovation.

482

Onsite locations, skills  
centres and offices across  
the UK & Ireland.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

1

Financial Highlights

Revenue

Gross profit

Underlying* operating profit

£942.7m

£82.8m

£10.3m

1.6%

11%

2020: £927.6m

2020: £74.6m

114.6%

2020: £4.8m

Reported profit after tax

£1.6m

£50.1m

Net cash/(debt)

£2.3m

£16.6m

Pre-IFRS 16 net cash/(debt)

£6.9m

£15.7m

2020: £(48.5)m

2020: £(14.3)m

2020: £(8.8)m

Basic and diluted  
earnings per share
(continuing operations)

Underlying* diluted  
earnings per share
(continuing operations)

7.1p

2.1p

2020: 5.0p

* 

 Underlying results exclude 
goodwill impairment, 
amortisation of intangible 
assets arising on business 
combinations, reorganisation 
costs and other non-underlying 
charges.

1.3p

72.8p

2020: (71.5)p

What’s inside

Pages 1 to 45

Pages 46 to 76

Pages 77 to 124

Strategic Report

Governance

46  Chairman’s Introduction
48  Board of Directors
50  Corporate Governance Report
56  Report on Remuneration 
60  Report of the Directors
64  Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 
65  Independent Auditor’s Report

1  Highlights 2021
2  At a Glance
4  Chairman’s Statement
6  Business Model
7  Strategic and Operational Priorities
8  Chief Executive Officer’s Review
12  Case Studies

– Recruitment GB
– Recruitment Ireland
– PeoplePlus
20  Financial Review
26  ESG Report and Section 172 statement
38  Principal Risks and Uncertainties 

Financial Statements

78   Consolidated Statement  
of Comprehensive Income
79   Consolidated Statement  
of Changes in Equity

80  Company Statement of Changes in Equity
81 
 Consolidated and Company Statements of 
Financial Position

82  Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
83  Notes to the Financial Statements
123  Staffline Group plc Unaudited Five-Year 

Summary of Financial Data

124 Company Details

 
 
 
2

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

At a Glance

Enabling the 
Future of Work

The Group has a clear purpose in 
assisting individuals nationwide 
with accessing sustainable 
employment opportunities.

All three of Staffline’s divisions 
delivered an excellent performance 
during 2021. In the Group’s 
Recruitment divisions, whilst 
operating against a backdrop of the 
well-publicised labour shortage, our 
GB and Ireland businesses continued 
to successfully support clients in 
what has become a rapidly evolving 

market. In PeoplePlus, due to the 
advancement of digital learning 
models and the Government’s 
relaxation of social distancing 
measures, we were pleased to see 
significantly greater numbers trained 
in our classrooms over the course of 
the year, both in-person and online.

PeoplePlus’ new 
#GetBritainWorking 
campaign in partnership 
with the recruitment 
businesses is closely 
supporting the UK 
Government’s Way to Work 
initiative to move 500,000 
people into work before 
June 2022.

Recruitment GB

A multi-disciplined recruitment business, market leader in blue-collar 
temporary staffing.

Revenue by sector

Food and related
Manufacturing
Retail
Driving
Other

2021

65%
5%
15%
13%
2%

2020

65%
6%
15%
13%
1%

•  381 customer onsite locations
•  Large branch network supporting our 

specialist brands

•  Recruitment process outsourcing 

(“RPO”) and managed service partner 
(“MSP”) expertise

•  Digital transformation projects 
reinforcing our leading position

•  Rapidly growing permanent and direct 

100%

100%

hire recruitment solutions

For more information 
see Recruitment GB  
on page 12

Live candidates on our database

c.1.4m

Workers deployed every day 
(average)

c.33,000

Worker satisfaction level

82.2%

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

3

PeoplePlus

A leading skills and employability business with a clear purpose to 
help people transform their lives, get jobs and keep jobs, and develop 
their careers. 

Revenue by sector

•  We supported c.15,000 learners in 2021 

with a 90% success rate

•  Strong market leadership and reputation 

Market share of skills support for  
the unemployed

Skills
Justice
Employability
Social care
Other

For more information 
see PeoplePlus  
on page 18.

2021

28%
33%
29%
8%
2%

2020

22%
42%
23%
9%
4%

100%

100%

in its chosen sectors of skills and 
employability

•  Mutual opportunities with Staffline 
Recruitment to grow and deepen 
employer links

•  Successfully mobilised three Restart  

sub-contracts

•  Working with 26 Local Authorities to 

provide Direct Payments support to over 
10,000 people 

47%

Prisons using our In-cell  
education service 

54

Contract pipeline

c.£600m

Recruitment Ireland

An award-winning agency, providing end-to-end recruitment 
solutions. Operating across 20 industry sectors.

For more information see 
Recruitment Ireland on 
page 16.

•  Highly successful branch network with 
10 branches throughout the island 
of Ireland

•  Gross margin increased to 10.1% in 2021 

from 8.7% in 2020

•  Permanent placement fees increased 
by 87% in 2021 from 2020, with a new 
Executive Search division coming 
in 2022

•  Broad sectoral coverage including 
major blue-collar, Public Sector 
contracts in NI and ROI, banking and 
other white-collar roles

•  Focus on greater penetration of Republic 
of Ireland with two new offices in 2022

Workers deployed every day 
(average)

c.4,500

Market share in Northern Ireland

21%

4

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Chairman’s Statement

Stability and 
resilience 
restored

Raising £46.4m of equity 
alongside the restructuring 
of the Group’s debt has 
provided Staffline with 
a strong financial and 
operational platform.

Introduction
2021 was a year in which the Group 
returned to growth. Staffline delivered a 
robust performance across both revenue 
and Underlying1 operating profit whilst 
continuing to build on the significant 
strategic progress achieved in the prior 
year, restoring stability and resilience.

This included a refinancing, which 
was completed in June 2021, raising 
£46.4m of equity alongside the 
restructuring of the Group’s debt, which 
has provided Staffline with a strong 
financial and operational platform. The 
proceeds enabled us to reduce Group 
indebtedness and to return to delivering 
profitable, cash generative growth. The 
strong response we received for the 
fundraising, both from new and existing 
investors, also provided a significant 
endorsement to the effectiveness of 

Staffline’s business strategy and belief 
in our ongoing success.

Ian Lawson
Chairman

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

5

In the year ended 31 December 2021, the 
Group generated revenues of £942.7m 
(2020: £927.6m), up 1.6%, and an 
underlying1 operating profit of £10.3m 
(2020: £4.8m), representing an increase of 
114.6%. This strong performance was as a 
result of the ongoing recovery of certain 
industries from the Covid-19 pandemic and 
new business wins, coupled with the Group 
beginning to realise the benefits from its cost 
reduction measures and the exit of lower-
margin business contracts. At 31 December 
2021, the Group had net cash (pre-IFRS 16)2 
of £6.9m (2020: net debt £(8.8)m). 

Operationally, all three of Staffline’s divisions 
delivered a robust performance during 2021. 
In the Group’s Recruitment divisions, whilst 
operating against a backdrop of the well-
publicised labour shortages, our GB and 
Ireland businesses continued to successfully 
support clients in what has become a rapidly 
evolving market. In PeoplePlus, due to the 
advancement of digital learning models 
and the Government’s relaxation of social 
distancing measures, we were pleased to see 
significantly greater numbers trained in our 
classrooms over the course of the year, both 
in-person and online. 

By continuing to implement our 
comprehensive business continuity and 
resilience initiatives, we believe the business 
is well placed to respond to any additional 
challenges during 2022 and look to build on 
the strong performance seen in 2021. 

Environmental, Social 
and Governance 
Staffline recognises the importance of 
adopting a strong environmental, social 
and governance (“ESG”) framework, and 
this underpins our overarching business 

objectives and is core to serving the needs 
of all of our key stakeholders. Improving 
Staffline’s ESG credentials is central to the 
Group’s development strategy, and we 
have formed a dedicated committee to 
help shape policy across these areas going 
forwards and it has become a key item on 
our Board agenda. A comprehensive outline 
of Staffline’s approach to ESG is included in 
the Group’s 2021 Annual Report. 

The Group has a clear purpose in assisting 
individuals nationwide with accessing 
sustainable employment opportunities, 
however, we continue to develop all elements 
of ESG across the business, with governance 
and compliance points of particular focus 
over the course of the past 18 months. 
Ensuring the proper processes are in place 
to increase accountability at every level 
of our operations is central to this, and 
we were pleased to have appointed a new 
head of Internal Audit to assist our efforts 
in this area. We are confident in the robust 
procedures we have in place across the 
business, and intend to build on these 
further in 2022.  

Board Composition and 
Management Changes 
We welcomed Tom Spain to the Board of 
Directors, in July 2021, as Non-Executive 
Director, representing the Company’s  
largest shareholder. 

Furthermore, in December 2021, Kenny 
Boyle was appointed Managing Director 
of PeoplePlus. An experienced operator in 
outsourced public services, Kenny joined 
PeoplePlus as Chief Operating Officer in 
2018 from Capita. 

Richard Thomson, Senior Independent 
Director, has informed the Board that he 
will not be standing for re-election at the 

Company’s AGM in 2022. Richard was 
appointed to the Board in September 2019 
and has played an integral part in the 
successful turnaround of the Group. The 
Board extends its thanks to Richard for 
the important part he has played in the 
restructuring of the Group.

Summary and Outlook 
On behalf of the Board and management 
of Staffline, I would like to thank all of 
our colleagues and customers for their 
contribution to our business during 
2021, without whom we would not be in 
the position we are today. We achieved 
strong trading during the period despite 
the ongoing macroeconomic challenges 
that were present, and continued to make 
significant strides operationally. 

Our strengthened balance sheet – coupled 
with the resilience measures that have been 
built into the business over the course of the 
last 18 months – have provided us with a 
strong operational and financial platform 
from which to continue to deliver growth, 
building upon the trading performance that 
we achieved in 2021. 

I would like to extend my thanks to both 
existing and new shareholders for their 
continuing support as demonstrated in the 
successful equity raise of June 2021.

We have made a strong start to 2022 and 
are confident in meeting our expectations 
for the full year. Whilst there are still some 
macroeconomic uncertainties and labour 
challenges, the Board of Directors is 
confident in the Group’s prospects in the 
medium to long term as we continue to seek 
to capitalise on our market-leading positions 
and strengthened business model.

Ian Lawson
Chairman
21 March 2022

+114.6%

Underlying1 operating profit increased over the prior year.

Alternative performance measures

1  Underlying results exclude goodwill impairment, 

amortisation of intangible assets arising on business 

combinations, reorganisation costs and other non-

underlying charges.

2  Presented on a pre-IFRS 16 basis, which excludes 

lease liabilities, and also excludes refinancing costs.

6

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Business Model

The UK’s leading provider of 
flexible blue-collar workers 
and a recognised national 
training provider

Inputs

What we do

Candidate network

Nationwide candidate networks for matching suitably skilled  
candidates with employers and wide-ranging skills and  
employability training programmes. 

Customer relationships/  
strategic partnerships

Well established and long-standing relationships with several  
blue-chip customers, medium-sized businesses, and over ten-year 
relationships with local and national government agencies. 

Technology

Our investment in technology and digital strategy outlines how we 
intend to make our clients more productive by harnessing the power 
of innovation. By exploiting emerging technologies, we will maximise 
our competitive advantage by driving efficiencies and implementing 
new recruitment models in order to deliver placement certainty.

Dedicated people

Our team brings a wealth of knowledge and years of experience to 
drive the continued success of Staffline. Through a positive culture 
and ethos our staff are dedicated to providing excellent service to 
candidates and customers alike.

Recruitment
Products and services
Resource, recruit and mobilise large-scale 
workforces to meet the ever-changing needs 
of clients, matching peaks and troughs on a 
continual basis. Recruitment process outsourcing 
and recruitment solutions.

PeoplePlus
Products and services
Frontline public services including employment 
support, skills training, independent living, and 
prison education, as well as recruitment, training 
and development solutions to employers.

Underpinned by
Our culture and values

 See more on page 33

Sustainability focus

 See more on page 36

Robust risk management

 See more on page 38

High standards of 
corporate governance

 See more on page 46

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

7

Strategic and Operational Priorities

Strategic priorities

Capitalise 
on market 
leadership

Staffline’s Recruitment divisions 
have market leading positions in 
the supply of temporary workers. 
Its scale and geographic 
coverage provide a competitive 
advantage and we expect 
to leverage this to win more 
customers and organically 
grow revenue.

Broaden the 
portfolio

Unlock the 
potential in 
training

Republic of 
Ireland

The Group now has broad 
capabilities and will leverage this 
to drive more permanent hiring 
and white-collar recruitment to 
increase the Group’s proportion 
of higher margin, cash 
generative recruitment.

We continue to transition 
PeoplePlus into a profitable 
employability and skills training 
provider and are beginning to 
use its unique database of labour 
to support Staffline’s recruitment 
divisions in a market experiencing 
acute labour shortages.

The Republic of Ireland has an 
attractive recruitment market, 
and the Group is growing 
through investment in additional 
branches and hiring additional 
fee-earning headcount.

Operational priorities

Actions

2021 progress

Operational  
excellence

Governance

Cost base

Digital and  
technology

Clients and  
branding

Talent

Focus & simplicity
Clear leadership
Organisational design
Fulfilment
KPI reporting

Main Board
Group policies
Strengthen finance
Internal audit and compliance
Robust framework

Well positioned for growth following delivery 
of the turnaround plan and new focus on 
core capabilities.

Board composition transformed and 
corporate governance processes 
strengthened. Head of Internal
Audit appointed.

Headcount
Group overhead synergies
Integration & balance sheet efficiencies
Profit & cash focus
Competitive positioning

Restructuring programme yielded significant 
reduction in administrative headcount and 
associated overhead. Surplus leasehold 
properties continue to be exited.

IT estate shared services
Tech supply chain
Cyber security & data
Automation & AI
Digital transformation

Brand alignment
Leveraging existing clients
Focus on growth sectors
Growing sales pipeline
Cross-selling

Succession & leadership
Talent attraction & retention
Productivity
Incentives & compensation

Ongoing investment in IT and embedded 
digital technology including “chatbot” 
development, facial recognition capability, 
predictive analytics for clients and 
cyber defence.

Irish businesses adopted the Staffline 
branding across the island. Building upon 
long-established relationships with strong 
contract base and future opportunities.

Prompt and imaginative solutions provided 
to clients in response to the Covid-19 
pandemic. Strengthened online, in-house 
training and development programmes.

8

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Chief Executive Officer’s Review

Right-sized business 
focused on core 
capabilities

+11%

Gross profit increase over  
the previous year to £82.8m  
from £74.6m.

Key Statistics

c.38,000

Providing temporary employment
(For blue-collar workers per day)

15,000

Training and support provided to adult 
learners to progress their careers

The scale of the Staffline 
Group across a large 
and growing number 
of industry sectors and 
services naturally gives 
rise to an extensive 
and wide-ranging 
stakeholder base.

Albert Ellis
Chief Executive Officer

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

9

Introduction
2021 was a milestone year for Staffline, 
during which we completed the turnaround 
of the business and transformed the Group’s 
balance sheet, whilst delivering a strong 
financial performance exceeding market 
expectations in profitability and cashflow. 
This was all achieved against an uncertain 
market backdrop, and we now believe 
that the Group has the platform to deliver 
sustainable growth going forward. 

A further market-wide theme which 
characterised 2021 was the tight labour 
market and supply chain disruption which 
continues to impact our clients. Using 
our market-leading position and digital 
technology, we have been able to support 
our customers through these challenges, 
and relationships have been strengthened 
as a result. For example, we have delivered 
innovative solutions to continue to supply 
drivers despite the widely publicised  
acute shortage. 

In the year ended 31 December 2021, the 
Group generated revenues of £942.7m 
(2020: £927.6m), up 1.6%, with an 11% increase 
in gross profit to £82.8m (2020: £74.6m). 
Underlying1 operating profit increased 114.6% 
to £10.3m (2020: £4.8m) with net cash 
(pre-IFRS 16)2 as at 31 December of £6.9m 
(2020: net debt of £(8.8)m). 

Our strong trading performance was 
achieved by successfully growing market 
share whilst exiting certain lower margin 
contracts, adding new customers across 
our Recruitment divisions and securing new 
contracts in PeoplePlus, including Restart, 
which we expect to benefit future trading 
periods. Furthermore, we continued to 
implement a number of productivity and 
margin improvement initiatives, which are 
now resulting in improved profitability. 

Ever-present Covid-19 restrictions were 
well documented throughout 2021 and 
had varying effects across our divisions. As 
previously noted, the Group was impacted 
by the severe lockdown that was in place in 
the UK in Q1 2021, and by the Government’s 
introduction of Plan B Covid-19 measures 
in Q4 2021, traditionally our peak trading 
period. However, we were successful in 
adapting our strategy, building on the robust 
Covid-19 response we implemented in 2020, 
to ensure business disruption was kept to a 
minimum and the safety and wellbeing of 
our workforce and our customers was the 
top priority. 

Group Restructuring 
We launched a comprehensive restructuring 
and transformation programme in 2020, 
which was successfully completed in 2021. 
This included strengthening governance and 
the balance sheet, as well as right-sizing the 
Group through a reduction in headcount 
and property rationalisation, resulting in 
significant annualised cost savings. 

Key to transforming the Group’s balance 
sheet was the equity fundraising and 
refinancing of the debt facilities, completed 
in June 2021. The £46.4m net proceeds 
were used to reduce indebtedness, in 
addition to providing ongoing working 
capital requirements as the Board focuses 
on the Group’s organic growth strategy. 
We were delighted with the positive response 
that we received from both new and 
existing shareholders for the fundraising, 
demonstrating both an endorsement of the 
strategic progress we had implemented 
in the turnaround but also of our future 
growth potential. 

The refinancing has had a transformational 
impact, with the Group achieving a positive 
net cash position at the outturn of the 
year with significant headroom within its 
debt facilities. 

Vision and Strategy 
Our vision is clear: to be a world class 
recruitment and training group, the clear 
market leader and trusted partner known for 
excellent service and integrity, driven forward 
by digital innovation. 

We have delivered on a number of key 
objectives within our strategy since the new 
management team was appointed in 2020, 
transforming the Group’s governance and 
management coupled with reducing its cost 
base and a refinancing. 

Going forward, our strategic priorities, 
which we believe will underpin Staffline’s 
sustainable growth, are as follows: 
•  To capitalise on the Group’s market 

leadership: 
Staffline’s Recruitment divisions have 
market-leading positions in the supply 
of temporary workers. Their scale 
and geographic coverage provide a 
competitive advantage and we expect to 
leverage this to win more customers and 
organically grow revenue. 

•  To broaden the portfolio of services: 
The Group now has broad capabilities 
and will leverage these to drive more 
permanent hiring and white-collar 
recruitment to increase the Group’s 
proportion of higher margin, cash 
generative recruitment. 

•  To unlock the potential in training: 
We continue to transition PeoplePlus 
into a profitable employability and skills 
training provider and are beginning to 
use its unique database of labour to 
support Staffline’s Recruitment divisions 
in a market experiencing acute labour 
shortages. 

•  To grow Republic of Ireland: 

The Republic of Ireland has an attractive 
recruitment market, and the Group is 
growing through investment in additional 
branches and hiring additional fee-
earning headcount.  

Alternative performance measures

1  Underlying results exclude goodwill impairment, amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations, 

reorganisation costs and other non-underlying charges.

2  Presented on a pre-IFRS 16 basis, which excludes lease liabilities, and also excludes refinancing costs.

10

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Operational Review 

Recruitment GB 

The Recruitment GB division performed 
strongly, growing revenues by 2.2% in 
2021 despite the division’s exit from a low 
margin, top five customer (by revenue). 
The team successfully secured a number 
of new business wins alongside expanding 
existing client mandates, a key feature of 
our strategy to broaden our operational 
footprint. Crucially, Recruitment GB 
delivered high levels of worker fulfilment 
within its core customers despite ongoing 
nationwide labour supply issues. 

Moreover, the division achieved a 69% year-
on-year growth in underlying1 operating profit 
as a result of a sharp focus on operating 
efficiencies and a swing in the mix of higher 
margin services outside of onsite blue-collar 
activity. This included the introduction of a 
new Direct Hire operation, a cross-sell initiative 
to recruit permanent blue-collar employees 
for existing customers. Furthermore, digital 
transformation projects, including our chatbot 
technology, also helped drive greater cost 
efficiency, improve applicant engagement and 
reinforced our position as a leading innovator 
within the recruitment industry. 

In addition, Brightwork, the division’s Scottish 
brand, renewed its top three customer 
accounts on new long-term mandates during 
the year. Omega, our technical engineering 
permanent and contract recruitment 
business, and Datum, our RPO business, 
both demonstrated significant recovery and 
year-on-year growth. 

Recruitment GB has entered 2022 with a 
strong pipeline of new business opportunities 
both across specialist sectors within which 
it has recently increased its footprint, such 

as construction and e-commerce, and in 
traditionally strong sectors for Staffline, 
such as automotive and travel. 

Recruitment Ireland 

A recovery in demand for permanent 
recruitment and a focus on white-collar 
recruitment in Recruitment Ireland 
underpinned a very strong performance in 
2021 despite Covid-19 measures being some 
of the strictest worldwide during the year. 
A hybrid operating model for employees 
was introduced to ensure the business could 
operate successfully, notwithstanding the 
pandemic-related restrictions. 

Gross margin grew 7.6% within the division 
in 2021 as a result of a strong recovery in 
permanent fees, which increased 87% versus 
2020, with the quantum of permanent 
fees generated in the second half of 2021 
exceeding those delivered for the full year 
in 2020. In addition, temporary recruitment 
gross margins improved to 8.5% during the 
period. Growth from the Republic of Ireland’s 
branch network was particularly strong, with 
a 23% increase in revenues over the year. 

The Group’s Recruitment Ireland division 
remains a key strategic driver for Staffline, 
particularly given its footprint and expertise 
within permanent and white-collar 
recruitment. The division has also entered 
2022 with a strong pipeline with plans to 
open a further two branches in the Republic 
to support future growth. 

PeoplePlus 

PeoplePlus increased profitability in the year 
following a significant period of restructuring 
in 2020, which continued into 2021 and 
included further alignment of its cost base. 

The division successfully adjusted its service 
in response to ongoing Covid-19 related 
restrictions, continuing the use of digital 
delivery models and achieving stability. 

As announced in June 2021, PeoplePlus 
secured a number of Restart sub-contracts 
which have been successfully mobilised. 
In addition, in the prison education sector, 
further roll out of our “in-cell” learning 
service was achieved, a key priority for 
the Ministry of Justice. 2021 also saw the 
highest ever starts on PeoplePlus’ New 
Enterprise Allowance scheme, which helps 
support individuals seeking to start their 
own business. Whilst there was a decline in 
demand for training across the hospitality 
and retail sectors, the business was able to 
pivot its focus to growth sectors, including 
construction. Our training services provided 
support to 15,000 learners. 

Finally, building on the success of our 
Social Recruitment Framework, we are 
delighted to announce the launch of 
our #GetBritainWorking initiative. This 
programme works with a consortium of large 
national employers to provide prospective 
candidates with guaranteed interviews 
for 1000’s of vacancies each month. The 
programme is central to our core business 
values – providing those distant from the 
employment market with the right tools  
and training to successfully re-enter  
the workforce. 

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

11

We have the strength of  
our balance sheet and of  
our operational agility to 
execute on more ambitious 
organic growth plans in  
the medium-term.

The labour market and recruitment 
landscape 

Demand for labour is currently at 
unprecedented levels, with 1.5 million job 
vacancies. The latest data from the Office for 
National Statistics reporting on the quarter 
ended 31 December 2021 reveals that the 
number of payrolled employees has now 
exceeded pre-pandemic levels, and as the 
success of the vaccine rollout increases 
business confidence, organisations continue 
to hire staff. The demand, combined with the 
impact of self-isolation measures, created 
a labour shortage immediately following 
the easing of restrictions during the summer 
of 2021. 

Employees, customers and 
stakeholders 

On behalf of the Board, I would like to 
thank all of our employees throughout the 
Group for their hard work and dedication 
during a year which once again presented 
significant challenges as a result of the 
Covid-19 pandemic. 

The scale of the Staffline Group across 
a large and growing number of industry 
sectors and services naturally gives rise to 
an extensive and wide-ranging stakeholder 
base. These include public bodies, 
consumers, business partners, shareholders, 
our employees and the communities we serve. 

We have been pleased over the past year 
to have significantly strengthened our 
partnerships with key customers and also the 
departments of the Government responsible 
for commissioning work. We will continue to 
nurture these commercial relationships. 

Summary 

The Group delivered an excellent performance 
in 2021, resulting in a number of upgrades 
to market expectations during the period. 
This was achieved despite ongoing 
macroeconomic headwinds, certain of 
which, management and the Board of 
Directors believe are showing signs of 
abating. This, coupled with the strong 
financial and operational platform that 
Staffline has developed, engenders a positive 
outlook for the Group. 

In the year to date, we are already building 
on the positive momentum achieved in 
2021 with a strong new business pipeline 
underpinning our growth prospects. 
Furthermore, having recapitalised and 
refinanced the Group, we have the balance 
sheet strength and operational agility to 
execute on more ambitious organic growth 
plans in the medium term.

Albert Ellis
Chief Executive Officer
21 March 2022 

12

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Case Studies

Recruitment GB

New business 
and cross-
selling gains

Frank Atkinson
Managing Director,  
Recruitment GB

“The steps we took to reorganise 
the division during 2020 have paid 
real dividends, and, thanks to the 
commitment and dedication of our 
remarkable Staffline people, we find 
ourselves looking positively towards 
the future.

We secured some fantastic new 
customers and new business during 
2021 and we know that many of 
our customers are growing and 
increasing their requirements 
from us. In addition, our strategic 
growth initiatives including digital 
transformation, revolution of the 
branch business and cross-selling 
of portfolio services, including our 
permanent and contract recruitment 
offerings, have really made 
an impact.”

HelloFresh is 
an innovative 
meal-kit 
business.

Its aim is to provide every household 
with wholesome, homemade meals. 
Everything required for a delicious 
meal is carefully planned, carefully 
sourced and delivered to the front 
door of each customer at the time 
most convenient for them.

The new HelloFresh distribution centre in the UK 
is the third largest in Europe.

Challenge
HelloFresh went to market to find a new partner 
for this site. They were looking for a partner who 
they could trust to deliver their requirements, 
was compliant, reactive, people-focused and 
supported by industry-leading technology.

They needed a partner that would be able to 
support the start-up site from commissioning, 
through soft-opening to business-as-usual, 
a partner with experience in the e-commerce 
market and with size and scale to match their 
own. They chose Staffline.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

13

Solution
In order to prepare for this new contract, 
our first priority was to fully understand the 
business, its needs and requirements. We 
recruited an experienced on-site account 
management team and together with our 
dedicated project management team, 
they spent time at the client’s Banbury 
facility to immerse ourselves into the culture 
and understand the unique systems and 
terminology used.

The next phase was to commence 
recruitment. With only one month between 
the first recruit starting and the first meal 
box sent out, the ramp-up in recruitment 
and training was a steep one. This was all 
taking place between Black Friday and 
Christmas 2020, traditionally our busiest 
time of year, and this gives an idea of the 
scale of the challenge.

To succeed, we use multiple methods of 
attraction. Our existing database and worker 
pool is the first tool we use to identify talent. 
We check other locations in the region 
that share complementary peaks, where 
an increase at one site is matched with a 
downturn in work at other local sites, allowing 
us to smoothly transition workers across the 
sites. Extending work opportunities is a huge 
benefit for the workers and a great benefit 
for the client as well.

New candidates are the next strand in our 
recruitment. We used every tool available 
to us including traditional media, direct 
messaging to potential workers on our 
database within a 15-mile radius, social 
media, posters, flyers and roadside banners. 

All media drive the candidates to our website 
where applicants can interact with Flin, our 
always-on, always-working chatbot. 

Flin takes the candidates through pre-
screening questions. The questions allow for 
further selection or de-selection to ensure 
they meet HelloFresh requirements and the 
candidates’ needs. 

Candidates create a secure profile on 
‘Staffline Universe’; and this profile remains 
with them throughout their working journey 
with Staffline. This means that candidates 
and workers can access their profile using 
a smartphone, tablet or computer to check, 
apply for work, arrange interviews and when 
working access rotas and pay slips. When 
assigned and in work, our workers use our 
industry-leading employee engagement tool. 
Have Your Say ensures worker satisfaction 
is measured ‘in the moment’ allowing us 
to act on issues immediately, resulting in 
industry-leading levels of staff satisfaction 
and retention.

All the candidates that are successful 
through the pre-screen stage with Flin are 
then contacted by our dedicated HelloFresh 
account management team where they are 
booked into a face-to-face interview and 
site tour. 

During the interview we use our unique ‘Scan, 
Check, Start’ application to instantly verify 
a worker’s right to work via their biometric 
passport or ID against the very latest Home 
Office rules. This provides our clients with an 
exceptional level of comfort in the fact that 
all our workers have the right to work in the 
UK and are fully compliant.

The initial inductions of the newly recruited 
workers took place in Banbury to ensure 
that workers could immerse themselves in 
the HelloFresh business at a live site, before 
moving to a brand new, purpose-built facility. 

Another challenge that had to be overcome 
was that all training was paused at the 
beginning as a consequence of Covid-19 
restrictions and the Staffline team and the 
recruited workers had to self-isolate due to 
Covid-19. Recruitment continued virtually 
and inductions were to be booked in at the 
Nuneaton site ‘going live’ that month and the 
first meal box left the new site only days later. 

Results
Staffline working in partnership with 
HelloFresh provided the following:

Through our use of people-led technology, 
experience and a thorough understanding 
of the market, we were able to support 
HelloFresh to hit their target for operations 
from the site within its first six months  
of operation, a massive milestone for  
the business.

Our partnership remains strong, and we 
have been involved in scoping exercise 
for identifying the location for the third 
distribution site, which is planned to open 
in May 2022. We look forward to adding 
further value to the HelloFresh business 
throughout 2022.

14

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Case Studies

Recruitment GB

New 
customer 
opportunities

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

15

Brightwork partner with a number 
of Scotland’s premium drinks 
manufacturers including Glen 
Turner, who are part of the La 
Martiniquaise group, the biggest 
supplier of blended whisky to the 
French market and in the Top 10 of 
suppliers worldwide.

Having expanded rapidly over the last 15 
years they have the Glen Moray Distillery in 
Morayshire and a state-of-the-art bottling 
site in Livingston.

Their introduction to Brightwork began through their 
participation in a food and drink industry roundtable 
discussion aimed at tackling the joint challenges 
manufacturers faced in Scotland to continue their 
operations in the face of the Covid-19 pandemic. 
They were attracted to the Brightwork Staffline brand 
proposition due to our involvement in the Scotland 
Against Modern Slavery (“SAMS”) initiative and strong 
CSR position, when they signed up to be a corporate 
partner of the Group in 2021. 

Glen Turner have an enviable portfolio of premium 
branded drinks products and brand protection is a 
key factor for them when choosing their key suppliers. 
They initially enlisted the Brightwork team to source 
talent for their Technical and Quality departments to 
drive forward business growth and innovation goals 
for their site in central Scotland. 

The success of this relationship then led to Brightwork 
becoming their sole supplier for frontline temporary 
staff within their manufacturing operation, and in 
ensuring they have the right level of support to the 
meet the needs of their global customer demands. 
Brightwork’s strong compliance processes including 
our ‘Scan, Check, Start’ technology, gave them 
confidence that our colleagues would go through 
rigorous screening and vetting before commencing 
work at any of their locations.

Culture and philosophy of “Enabling people into 
good work” struck a chord with Ian McLaren, 
General Manager for their Scottish operations, who 
commented: “The whisky industry in general, and 
Glen Turner specifically, can provide people with 
excellent job and career opportunities and the ability 
to develop their skills in a range of different technical 
and business areas. We know that Brightwork is 
the right partner for us to find the best talent in our 
industry and help us realise our business objectives 
into the future.”

David McKay, Director of Brightwork’s Drinks 
Division advised: “Brightwork have over 80 percent 
of the blue-collar temporary recruitment market for 
premium drinks companies in Scotland and we are 
delighted to be able to represent Glen Turner/Glen 
Moray in their local areas. They are a recognised 
employer of choice and this has opened a gateway 
for our workers to embark on careers within this highly 
reputable employer.”

16

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Case Studies

Recruitment Ireland

Increasing 
market 
presence

Tina McKenzie
Managing Director,  
Recruitment Ireland

“2021 was a fantastic year for 
the Irish business, not just in 
delivering an excellent financial 
result; but also in cementing our 
position as the dominant market 
leader in Northern Ireland by 
successfully launching Executive 
Recruitment and advancing our 
strategic vision of growth in 
the Republic of Ireland with the 
expansion of our branch network.

We also invested in the 
development of our sales team 
in order to build a really exciting 
pipeline for 2022 and we 
commenced the implementation 
of our CRM upgrade to ensure we 
continue to deliver a best-in-class 
service for clients and candidates 
going forward.”

We make food  
the best it can be,  
without being 
bound by the 
way it has always 
been done

Finnebrogue Artisan is one of the UK’s 
leading artisan food producers. A family-
owned business based in Downpatrick, 
Northern Ireland, they have made their 
name producing premium sausages, 
venison, bacon, Wagyu beef and more 
recently a full range of plant-based 
products. Relentless innovation is at the 
heart of everything they do and as a 
major supplier to most of the UK’s major 
supermarkets they have expanded to over 
12,000 staff, have invested over €90m in 
their business since 2015, donated over 
€1m to tackle poverty and now have four 
state-of-the-art facilities. 

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

17

Staffline Ireland was appointed as supplier of temporary 
labour to Finnebrogue in 2021. The use of agency staff was not 
something that they had embraced before, however, this client 
saw Staffline’s ability to scale up and provide support with 
their peak requirements in a difficult candidate market. 
We are looking forward to working with Finnebrogue 
throughout 2022 to help drive their ambitious business growth.

In 2021 Staffline entered and were ultimately 
successful in a competitive tender process 
to become the single source of temporary 
labour for Finnebrogue’s Northern Ireland 
operations. Finnebrogue had never 
previously engaged with an agency for the 
provision of temporary labour, so this was 
an exciting opportunity for Staffline to really 
demonstrate how the use of temporary 
labour can support a business’s growth 
strategy on a greenfield site.

Key Deliverables
Once appointed, Staffline Ireland’s marketing 
team immediately met with key stakeholders 
in Finnebrogue to devise a recruitment 
marketing campaign which included video 
case studies with Finnebrogue employees, 

open days, and joint branded advertising 
to position Finnebrogue as an employer 
of choice in the local area and attract 
candidates for the roles. 

Key to the contract is the peak season 
in which a range of specialist Christmas 
products are produced for retailers including 
Asda, Waitrose and Morrisons to name a 
few. As this was our first experience of a peak 
season with Finnebrogue, our on-site team 
worked tirelessly to scale up and provide 
additional staff to cover the additional 
demand and ensure customer orders were 
met on time. This was highly successful, and 
we are planning to significantly increase 
the numbers of Staffline colleagues on 
assignment in Finnebrogue throughout 2022 
and beyond. 

 
18

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Case Studies

PeoplePlus

Focused on 
skills and 
employability

PeoplePlus & Tesco

Kenny Boyle
Managing Director,  
PeoplePlus

“Supported by significant 
new business wins in 
the year, we have not 
only further sharpened 
our delivery models in 
each of our key sectors, 
but continued to drive 
greater operational 
alignment – particularly 
between our Skills and 
Employability businesses – 
to maximise the breadth and 
effectiveness of the services 
we offer to customers and 
clients alike. 

Our new generation of 
digital platforms has 
afforded us service 
flexibility in response to 
Covid-related restrictions 
and provides the basis for 
continued market leadership 
through technology and 
operational innovation. 
Allied to a strong business 
development pipeline, these 
distinctive capabilities have 
the clear potential to power 
our future growth.” 

PeoplePlus has worked with  
Tesco since 2019 supporting  
them with their recruitment 
across their distribution centres 
and retail stores.
Staffline support several of the distribution 
centres with their high-volume blue-collar 
recruitment which is also supported by The 
Social Recruitment Framework (“SRF”) team 
at PeoplePlus. The SRF works in partnership 
with Staffline to support with recruitment 
focusing on individuals who are long-term 
unemployed and require upskilling prior 
to moving into a job. The aim is to ensure 
individuals are provided with the relevant 
support to ensure they are better prepared 
for their guaranteed interview post course. 

The Tesco festive recruitment initiative 
started as a pilot in Wales for jobs in retail 
and its success soon spread to their stores in 
England. Tesco asked PeoplePlus’ SRF team 
to coordinate the training and subsequent 
interview schedule to enable as many people 
as possible to start working in Tesco stores in 
the run up to Christmas. 

PeoplePlus was chosen as the supplier 
outside of their direct hire recruitment  
and collaborated with the Job Centre Plus 
and training providers on its network to 
provide Tesco with one point of contact via 
the SRF for all the training and recruitment 
for over 50 stores across England and  
Wales, including a brand-new store  
opening in Wolverhampton. 

To date, the festive initiative has trained 245 
people, with 24% securing employment and 
a further 26% ready to enter employment 
in the coming weeks. In addition to this, the 
SRF and its partner network has delivered 
warehousing training to a further 722 people, 
with 34% starting work with Tesco in a 
warehousing role.

Vas Skoulidou, Work Placements Programme 
Manager at Tesco commented:

“Tesco is proud to be working in partnership 
with PeoplePlus and the DWP to provide 
work placement opportunities across its 
stores in Britain. We are all passionate 
about helping young people who are not in 
education, employment or training and who 
are facing additional barriers or challenges 
to finding work. PeoplePlus have been 
100% professional and shown commitment 
throughout to deliver a quality experience 
for the learners and for the employer and we 
really look forward to building on this in the 
coming years.”

One person who benefited from the initiative 
is Patricia, who was a carer for her husband 
until he passed away three years ago. She 
then moved into temporary employment 
but struggled to find further work when the 
Covid-19 pandemic hit. She was referred 
via the Job Centre to online training 
provider Pet-Xi who are on the PeoplePlus 
SRF network.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

19

Delivering 
education 
and training 
to offenders 
and ex-
offenders

At PeoplePlus, the support offered to 
offenders and ex-offenders in the justice 
system includes face-to-face classroom 
and in-cell learning, an information advice 
and guidance service detailing employment 
opportunities for ex-offenders once 
they leave prison, as well as a bespoke 
educational television channel – Wayout TV, 
shown in 54 prisons throughout England. 

PeoplePlus has delivered education in 
prisons for 15 years; they are also the 
largest independent provider of prison 
education in England. Nearly a third of all 
PeoplePlus colleagues work in the Justice 
division of the business and the impact 
their work has on changing people’s 
lives and supporting those with some 
of the most challenging barriers is truly 
life changing. 

In an average year 2 million hours of 
face-to-face learning is delivered across 
PeoplePlus’ prison network, and each hour 
of education has the potential to persuade 
offenders to choose a different path in life 
- to change their life for the better. Behind 
each statistic is a story of a real person. 
One of these people is Matt, and this is  
his story:

Matt started his learning journey with 
PeoplePlus while incarcerated at HMP 
Bedford. Matt had spent over four years  
in custody, with 53 convictions and 104 
offences. He engaged with the prison 
education team and took part in various 
courses including Managing Personal 
Finance, Time Management, and Effective 
Communication in the Workplace. 

Matt wanted to achieve something during 
his time in prison and have a fresh start 
once he left. He attended face-to-face 
tutoring sessions and completed written 
workbooks in order to complete his 
assignments, developing a close working 
relationship with his tutor who was able to 
encourage Matt, offer advice and support, 
and ensure he passed his courses. 

On completing his courses at HMP Bedford 
and in preparing for his release from prison, 
Matt was put in touch with the PeoplePlus 

employer engagement team who were 
able to refer Matt onto support services 
including The Hope Foundation and a local 
housing charity. Due to these referrals, on 
his release from prison Matt was able to 
secure housing, receive counselling and 
has had a smooth transition back into the 
community. PeoplePlus also helped secure 
paid full-time employment for Matt working 
in a warehouse as a delivery driver, a role 
he is very much proud of. 

Of his experience with PeoplePlus, Matt said:

“Since leaving prison I’m very fortunate to 
have the support of Jo from PeoplePlus, 
who has continued to support me in many 
different ways. She has put me through 
to The Hope Foundation and I am now 
receiving counselling. She has given me 
advice, guidance, and the main aspect for 
me is that this has been consistent. This has 
been a consistent source of strength for 
me. The goals and things I wish to achieve 
in the future are more attainable having 
Jo there.

Since being released from HMP Bedford, 
I made a decision to change my life no 
matter what, for myself and the family 
I had created. This has been the best 
decision I have ever made as family ties 
are better than ever as they can all see 
a change. With continuing to go to work 
every day and addressing areas in my 
life that I intend to improve, I know I can 
maintain my success.

We all make mistakes and handle things 
in our own ways. It is paramount that we 
do not let our mistakes consume us and 
that the way in which things are handled 
are for the greater good. Anybody can 
achieve this type of success despite any 
circumstance. Even whilst incarcerated, a 
man can achieve and make and plan for 
his own soul.”

Patricia had already unsuccessfully 
applied for two vacancies at Tesco, so was 
keen to take part in the programme to 
develop her employability skills and gain 
a better insight on Tesco and hopefully be 
successful for a third time lucky. Patricia 
really benefited from the qualifications 
undertaken on the programme, and the 
work experience, and was successful 
in securing a role with Tesco. Of her 
experience with PeoplePlus, Patricia said:

“Both the course and the work experience 
really boosted my confidence and gave 
me the skills and knowledge I needed for 
the position.

I’m thankful that I took part in the scheme 
and I’m already enjoying my new position 
at Tesco.”

PeoplePlus and Tesco are planning on 
working together on the training and 
recruitment for the new and existing stores 
throughout 2022. 

20

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Financial Review

Balance sheet 
transformed following 
the equity raise and 
refinancing

Strong performances in 
all divisions, resulting 
in Group gross margin 
+0.8%pts to 8.8%.

Improved gross profit 
conversion generating 
a more than doubling 
of underlying1 
operating profits.

Daniel Quint
Chief Financial
Officer

Net 
cash2 of 
£6.9m

Improved by £15.7m.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

21

Introduction
The Group traded very strongly during 2021, 
despite the now well documented operational 
headwinds, which included ongoing Covid-19 
restrictions, labour shortages and global 
supply chain issues. Total revenue for the 
year of £942.7m (2020: £927.6m) was higher 
than the previous year by 1.6%. The exiting 
from certain lower margin contracts in the 
Recruitment GB division, equating to c. £40m 
of annual revenue, meant that the like-for-like 
increase in revenues was c. 6%. Gross profit 

improved in all three divisions, delivering an 
overall increase of 11.0% to £82.8m (2020: 
£74.6m), with overall gross profit margin 
increasing to 8.8% (2020: 8.0%). 

The Group comprises three divisions, 
namely, Recruitment GB, flexible blue-collar 
recruitment; Recruitment Ireland, generalist 
recruitment; and PeoplePlus, adult skills and 
training provision. 

Strong trading results, despite 
ongoing Covid-19 restrictions, 
labour shortages and global 
supply chain issues.

Underlying1 divisional performance – continuing operations

Revenue
Year-on-year revenue 
increase/(decline)

Gross profit
Year-on-year gross profit 
increase/(decline)
Gross profit as a % of revenue

Underlying operating profit/
(loss) 
Underlying operating profit as 
a % of revenue
Underlying operating profit as 
a % of gross profit

Pre-IFRS 162 net debt excluding 
unamortised refinancing costs
Post-IFRS 16 net debt excluding 
unamortised refinancing costs

Recruitment 
GB  
2021 
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland 
2021 
£m

PeoplePlus 
2021 
£m

Group 
Costs 
2021 
£m

Total Group 
2021 
£m

Recruitment
GB
2020
£m

Recruitment
Ireland
2020
£m

PeoplePlus
2020
£m

Group  
Costs
2020
£m

747.9

111.7

83.1

2.2%

(7.3)% 10.8%

50.7

11.3

20.8

9.7%
6.8%

7.6%
16.2%
10.1% 25.0%

–

–

–

–
–

942.7

732.1

120.5

75.0

1.6%

(12.8)% (18.4)%

(0.4)%

82.8

46.2

10.5

17.9

11.0%
8.8%

(18.4)%
6.3%

(32.6)%
8.7%

17.0%
23.9%

–

–

–

–
–

Total Group
2020
£m

927.6

(12.7)%

74.6

(14.7)%
8.0%

7.1

2.5

4.1

(3.4)

10.3

4.2

1.6

1.6

(2.6)

4.8

0.9%

2.2%

4.9%

14.0%

22.1%

19.7%

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

1.1%

0.6%

1.3%

2.1%

12.4%

9.1%

15.2%

8.9%

6.9

2.3

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Key performance indicators – continuing operations

Hours worked by temporary workers
Gross profit per fee earner
Revenue per employee

Recruitment 
GB  
2021

Recruitment 
Ireland 
2021

PeoplePlus 
2021

Total  
Group 
2021

Recruitment 
GB  
2020

Recruitment 
Ireland 
2020

PeoplePlus 
2020

51.1m
£71.5k
–

7.1m
£111.5k
–

–
–
£62.6k

58.2m
£76.5k
–

55.6m
£62.4k
–

7.5m
£109.1k
–

–
–
£52.9k

Alternative performance measures

1  Underlying results exclude goodwill impairment, amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations, reorganisation costs 

and other non-underlying charges.

2  Presented on a pre-IFRS16 basis, which excludes lease liabilities, and also excludes refinancing costs.

0.5%

6.4%

(8.8)

(14.3)

Total  
Group 
2020

63.1m
£67.9k
–

22

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Financial Review continued

Recruitment GB 

PeoplePlus 

Revenues in the Recruitment GB division 
increased by £15.8m to £747.9m. The exiting 
from certain lower margin contracts, 
equating to c. £40m of annual revenue, 
was mitigated by strong new business 
momentum both in securing new contracts 
and expanding with existing customers. 

Gross profit margin in Recruitment GB 
increased to 6.8% (2020: 6.3%). This was 
principally due to the exit from certain lower 
margin contracts supplemented by a gradual 
shift in customer mix away from lower 
margin sectors such as food production as 
lockdown restrictions eased. The increase in 
the National Minimum Wage in April 2021, 
from £8.72 to £8.91 per hour for over 23s, does 
not impact absolute gross profit but does 
negatively impact gross margin percentage 
achieved, and it is anticipated this dynamic 
will continue with increases in April each year. 

Gross profit generated from temporary 
recruitment reduced as a proportion of 
the total to 95.7% (2020: 97.0%), with the 
remaining 4.3% (2020: 3.0%) of gross profit 
generated from permanent recruitment. This 
represented a 57% increase in gross profit 
generated from permanent recruitment to 
£2.2m (2020: £1.4m). Hours worked reduced 
to 51.1m (2020: 55.6m) mainly as a result 
of the exiting from a top five low margin 
contract, as well as the widely documented 
labour shortages in the second half of 
the year. 

Recruitment Ireland 

Revenues in the Recruitment Ireland division 
reduced by £8.8m to £111.7m, mainly due to 
the strict lockdown measures in Ireland in 
Q1 2021 in contrast to a very strong pre-
Covid Q1 2020. Whilst restrictions impacted 
performance, a focus on margin growth 
and gross profit mix in favour of permanent 
recruitment, particularly in the white-collar 
sector, ensured a strong flow through to 
gross profit in H2 2021. The gross profit 
margin for Recruitment Ireland increased 
to 10.1% (2020: 8.7%) driven by a change in 
mix toward permanent recruitment business, 
which consistently achieves a gross margin 
of 100%. Gross profit generated from 
temporary recruitment accounted for 86.7% 
(2020: 92.4%) of the total, with the remaining 
13.3% (2020: 7.6%) of gross profit generated 
from permanent recruitment. Hours worked 
decreased to 7.1m (2020: 7.5m).

With the gradual reopening of various 
learner centres and improved revenues in the 
Employability division, PeoplePlus revenues 
increased to £83.1m (2020: £75.0m). A 
rebuilding of the division’s footprint was 
undertaken in 2021, which included further 
alignment of the cost base. An additional 
impact in the Skills division was the discovery 
of incomplete records relating to 2019, 
as highlighted in the Company’s trading 
update in January 2022, which require the 
repayment of £2.3m of revenue. Based on 
its legacy nature, this has been adjusted 
through reserves (see note 3). Of the £2.3m, 
£0.8m has already been repaid in 2021, with 
the balance paid in February 2022. 

Revenue per employee was £62.6k during 
2021 (2020: £52.9k), an 18.3% increase, 
driven by the significant cost base efficiency 
reductions. PeoplePlus achieved a gross 
margin of 25.0% in 2021, which compares 
to 23.9% in 2020, largely due to improved 
productivity following further restructuring 
during the year. 

Group costs

Group costs, which include Director’s 
remuneration costs, have increased due 
to the inclusion of bonus awards for the 
Executive Directors. No bonuses were paid 
for 2020. 

Group result 

Underlying operating profit was £10.3m 
(2020: £4.8m), a significant increase of 
114.6%, and ahead of market expectations 
for the year. Total non-underlying charges 
on continuing activities before tax, which are 
described below, were £8.0m (2020: £49.1m), 
which was all non-cash. Finance charges 
before refinancing costs were £2.4m (2020: 
£4.1m). Costs of £1.5m in respect of the debt 
refinancing in June 2021 are included within 
other receivables on the balance sheet 
and are being amortised over the term of 
the facility. 

The underlying profit before taxation on 
continuing operations for 2021 was £7.9m 
(2020: £0.7m). Underlying profit before 
taxation as a percentage of revenue was 
0.8% (2020: 0.1%). The reported underlying 
profit after tax on continuing operations for 
2021 was £8.7m (2020: £3.4m). 

The Group’s reported loss before taxation 
was £(0.1)m in 2021 (2020: £(51.6)m).

Alternative Performance 
Measures
In the reporting of its financial performance, 
the Group uses a limited number of 
alternative performance measures that 
are not defined under IFRS, the Generally 
Accepted Accounting Principles (“GAAP”) 
under which the Group reports. The Directors 
believe that these non-GAAP measures, 
which have been consistently applied over 
time, assist with the understanding of the 
performance of the business and are not 
given undue prominence in these financial 
statements. These non-GAAP measures are 
not a substitute for, or superior to, any IFRS 
measures of performance but they have 
been included as an additional means of 
comparing performance year-on-year. 

Non-underlying Items
Non-underlying items of income or 
expenditure are items that are either 
non-recurring or of a particular size or 
nature such that they require separate 
identification. Non-underlying items are 
included in total reported results but are 
excluded from underlying results. Certain 
items can vary significantly from year 
to year and therefore create volatility in 
reported earnings. It should be noted that 
whilst the amortisation of intangible assets 
arising on business combinations has 
been added back, the revenue from those 
acquisitions has not been eliminated. 

Non-underlying charges on continuing 
activities before tax amounted solely to 
£8.0m in 2021 (2020: £49.1m), relating to 
amortisation of intangible assets arising 
on business combinations. For 2020, the 
costs included exceptional reorganisation, 
rationalisation and restructuring costs of 
£4.0m relating principally to a rationalisation 
programme across all the divisions in order 
to reduce the number of properties occupied 
and reducing administration headcount, 
refinancing costs of £0.5m related to the 
Group exploring strategic options, a £9.2m 
charge for the amortisation of intangible 
assets arising on business combinations, a 
£35.3m goodwill impairment charge, and a 
share-based payment charge of £0.1m. 

The charge in the year for amortisation 
of intangible assets arising on business 
combinations relates to the following 
acquisitions: Vital Recruitment (charge 
£3.2m: asset will be fully amortised by 
February 2023), Passionate about People 
(charge £2.3m: asset will be fully amortised 
by October 2023), Grafton (£1.3m: asset will 
be fully amortised by June 2023), Brightwork 
(charge £0.7m: asset will be fully amortised 
by April 2022), others (charge £0.5m: asset 
will be fully amortised during 2022).

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

23

Non-underlying charges – continuing operations

Reorganisation, rationalisation and restructuring costs
Transaction costs – business acquisitions and strategic options
Amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations
Goodwill impairment
Share-based payment charges (equity and cash-settled)

Total non-underlying charges before tax for continuing operations

2021
£m

–
–
8.0
–
–

8.0

2020
£m

4.0
0.5
9.2
35.3
0.1

49.1

Discontinued Activities 
On 1 December 2020, the Group sold its loss-
making Apprenticeships training business 
for a nominal sum. The sale agreement 
required PeoplePlus to provide working 
capital support to the purchaser in the 
form of reimbursement of relevant salary 
costs incurred between December 2020 
and March 2021, which is being repaid over 
12 months from May 2021. 

In 2020, the Apprenticeships business 
recorded an underlying operating loss of 
£(2.2)m for the year, before reorganisation 
and exit costs of £(2.5)m. During 2021, 
further exit costs of £0.3m were incurred. 

The Group completed its disposal of its 
subsidiaries in Poland to the incumbent 
management team in December 2021.  
The results of the Polish activities were 
deemed to be discontinued during 2020  
and the loss for that year was £(0.3)m.  
Costs incurred during 2021, principally for 
legal fees, amounted to £0.1m. 

Government Support 
In 2020, the Group took advantage of the 
forbearance scheme for the deferral of VAT 
due between March and June 2020. 

The total deferral agreed with HMRC 
under the UK scheme amounted to £42.4m 
after offset of a corporation tax refund 
due in relation to the financial year 2018. 
Repayment of the balance commenced in 
June 2021 and the final instalment of £5.8m 
was paid in January 2022. 

Whilst the effects of the pandemic were 
less severe in 2021, it was still necessary to 
place a small number of workers and staff 
on furlough for short periods. The support 
received totalled £1.6m in the year. 

Finance Costs 
Finance costs, excluding refinancing costs, 
incurred in the year amounted to £2.4m 
(2020: £4.1m). The Group has sought to limit 
its exposure to future interest rate increases 
through the use of derivative financial 
instruments. During the year the Group 
has entered into an amortising interest rate 
cap instrument, which reduces exposure to 
interest rate increases above 1% of SONIA on 
an aggregated two-thirds of the Receivables 
Finance Agreement and the customer 
finance arrangements. The instrument, which 
has a term of three years from 13 October 
2021, is based on quarterly notional amounts 
varying between £39.5m and £62.5m, with 
an average of £51.9m. 

Taxation 
The total tax credit for the year was £1.7m 
(2020: £3.1m), which comprises a corporation 
tax credit relating to prior years and the 
movement of deferred tax balances. The 
Group has no current corporation tax liability 
in respect of either 2021 or prior years and 
is anticipating a refund of £0.4m relating 
to tax losses carried back to a prior period. 
Remaining tax losses of £16.7m carried 
forward in all divisions have been recognised 
as a deferred tax asset. 

The amortisation charge relating to 
intangible assets arising on business 
combinations is not deductible under UK 
corporation tax and is therefore added back 
to taxable profits. A deferred tax liability is 
recognised in respect of other intangible 
assets. This liability is reduced each year in 
line with the amortisation charge, giving rise 
to a deferred tax credit each year. 

Earnings Per Share 
Statutory basic and diluted loss per share on 
continuing activities in 2021 were both 1.3p 
(2020: both (71.5)p loss). 

For the year, the weighted average number 
of shares (basic) is 122,178,126 (2020: 
67,790,086). 

Removing the non-underlying charges, and 
their respective taxation impacts, results in 
underlying basic earnings per share of 7.1p 
and diluted earnings per share of 6.9p on 
continuing activities (2020: both 5.0p). 

The table below reconciles underlying EBITDA (earnings before interest, taxation, depreciation and amortisation), on continuing operations to 
operating profit/(loss).

Reconciliation of operating loss to EBITDA

Operating profit/(loss)
Non-underlying costs

Underlying operating profit

Depreciation and loss on disposals

Underlying EBITDA

Lease rental payments

Underlying EBITDA (pre-IFRS 16)

2021 
£m

2.3
8.0

10.3

6.6

16.9

(1.7)

15.2

2020
£m

(44.3)
49.1

4.8

7.4

12.2

(2.9)

9.3

Note: Underlying operating profit is before goodwill impairment, amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations, reorganisation costs and other non-
underlying costs. EBITDA represents Earnings Before Interest, Taxation, Depreciation and Amortisation.

24

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Financial Review continued

Statement of Financial Position, Cash Generation and Financing 
The Group’s total equity increased by £48.3m (2020: decrease of £(53.6)m) over the year. This is as a result of the placing, subscription and 
open offer, which raised net proceeds of £46.4m plus the net movements on reserves of £1.9m, as disclosed in the Consolidated Statement of 
Changes in Equity. 

The movement in net debt is shown in the table below. The main movement in working capital comprised the repayment of deferred VAT of 
£40.7m. Strong trade receivables collection resulted in £5.6m of net inflows, which was offset by £17.8m due to the absorption of receivables 
previously financed under a non-recourse facility. 

Movement in net debt (excluding unamortised refinancing costs) 

Opening net debt (pre-IFRS 16)
Cash generated before change in working capital and share option
Principal repayment of lease liabilities
Change in trade and other receivables
Deferred VAT (net of corporation tax offset)
Change in trade, other payables and provisions
Taxation and interest paid
Capital investment (net of disposals)
Cash flows relating to acquisition
Net proceeds from equity issue
Payments from restricted funds for NMW
Settlement of NMW liabilities from restricted funds
Other

Closing net cash/(debt) (pre-IFRS 16)
IFRS 16 lease liabilities

Closing net cash/(debt) (post-IFRS 16)

2021
£m

(8.8)
16.5
(1.7)
(12.2)
(36.6)
3.5
3.9
(4.5)
–
46.4
0.9
(0.9)
0.4

6.9
(4.6)

2.3

2020
£m

(59.5)
3.4
(3.4)
27.6
42.4
(7.8)
(9.0)
(2.4)
(0.3)
–
11.8
(11.8)
0.2

(8.8)
(5.5)

(14.3)

Note: Underlying operating profit is before goodwill impairment, amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations, reorganisation costs and other non-
underlying costs. EBITDA represents Earnings Before Interest, Taxation, Depreciation and Amortisation.

Net (debt)/cash (pre-IFRS16) bridge FY 2020 – FY 2021

Net cash (pre-IFRS16) of £6.9m, up £15.7m despite repaying £40.7m of £46.5m deferred VAT. Substantial improvement of £46.4m of net funds 
generated through the equity raise, improved trading cash flow and cash collections, including c.£10m of timing differences.

20

10

0

(10)

£m

(20)

(30)

(40)

(50)

(60)

(8.8)

15.2

(4.5)

13.7

8.9

(2.4)

5.8

(17.8)

6.9

(40.7)

46.4

0

2

Y

b t  F

e

e t  d

N

A

D

B I T

g   E

e rl y i n

d

n

U

x

e

p

a

C

s t

I n t e r e

b l e

a

e i v

c

e

R

s   &   o t h

c

/

e r  w

o r a ti o

o r p

C

d

e

e i v

c

x  r e

n  t a

e

e   d

c

n

a l a

b

-

ff

O

b

-

n

g   o

m i n

o

b t  c

n t

m e

y

a

p

T  r e

A

d   V

e

c

n

a l a

e f e r r e

D

q

s   o f  e

d

e

e

c

P r o

e

u it y  r a is

2 1

Y

h   F

s

a

c

b t) /

e

e t ( d

N

The Group’s headroom relative to available committed banking facilities as at 31 December 2021 was £78.4m (2020: £79.4m) as set out below:

Cash at bank
Undrawn receivables finance facility agreement

Banking facility headroom

2021 
£m

29.8
48.6

78.4

2020
£m

24.5
54.9

79.4

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

25

Going Concern 
For the period to 31 December 2023, the 
Group’s cash flow forecasts indicate ongoing 
headroom in the Receivables Finance 
Agreement and also full compliance with the 
financial covenants contained therein. The 
Group has sufficient day to day liquidity 
to ensure that short-term liabilities can be 
satisfied as and when they fall due. 

The financial statements have been prepared 
on a going concern basis. The Directors 
have reviewed this basis and have made full 
disclosure in note 3, concluding that there 
is a reasonable expectation that the Group 
and Company have adequate resources 
to continue in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future. 

Daniel Quint 
Chief Financial Officer 
21 March 2022

An arrangement fee of £0.9m was paid to the 
lenders in respect of the RFA. 

The new facility enabled the cancellation 
of the Group’s existing facilities, which 
comprised a Revolving Credit Facility of 
£20.0m, a Receivables Finance Facility of 
£68.2m and a non-recourse Receivables 
Purchase Facility of £25.0m. 

The Group announced a proposed 
Placing, Subscription and Open Offer (the 
“Fundraise”) on 21 May 2021 following 
conditional agreement of the debt 
refinancing the previous day. The Fundraise 
comprised the following elements: 
•  A total of 87,249,500 new ordinary 

shares of 10 pence each placed at a 
price of 50 pence per share (the “Issue 
Price”) to certain existing shareholders, 
new institutional investors and certain 
Directors and employees of the Group; 
•  A total of 750,500 new ordinary shares 
of 10 pence each to certain Directors 
and employees of the Group at the Issue 
Price; and

•  An open offer to existing shareholders of 
10 shares for every 78 ordinary shares 
held, for a total of 8,837,242 new ordinary 
shares of 10 pence each at the Issue Price. 

The total gross proceeds of the Fundraise, 
which was approved by the shareholders 
in a General Meeting on 9 June 2021, were 
£48.4m. The total costs of the Fundraise 
and debt refinancing were £4.0m. The net 
proceeds have been used to reduce total 
indebtedness and to provide working capital 
for growth. 

The Group is also funded through a number 
of separate, non-recourse, customer 
financing arrangements whereby specific 
customers’ invoices are settled in advance of 
their normal settlement date. The balance 
funded under these arrangements as at 31 
December 2021 was £42.3m (2020: £43.0m). 

Dividends 
The Board is not proposing a final dividend 
payment for 2021.

Equity Fundraise and Debt 
Refinancing 
At the time of the refinancing of the Group’s 
facilities on 26 June 2020, the Group’s 
liquidity forecast for the period ending 31 
December 2021, which was prepared in 
support of that refinancing, indicated that 
the Group would not have sufficient funds 
to repay deferred VAT, believed at the time 
to be due for repayment in full on or before 
31 March 2021. 

In September 2020, the UK Government 
announced that an instalment payment 
scheme would be introduced, and details 
of the final scheme were published on 
23 February 2021. The revised repayment 
profile had the effect of delaying the 
potential liquidity shortfall from March 2021 
to later in the year. 

In order to address the liquidity shortfall, 
the Directors engaged professional advisers 
in late 2020 to assess the Group’s options 
for refinancing its debt facilities and to 
engage with potential lenders. On 20 May 
2021, following a detailed appraisal by 
the Directors, the Company and certain 
subsidiary undertakings entered into a new 
Receivables Financing Agreement (“RFA”) 
to replace the existing Group funding 
arrangements. The RFA contained certain 
requirements to be met before completion, 
the most significant of which was that the 
Company raise new equity capital of at least 
£40.0m. This condition was satisfied and the 
RFA became effective on 10 June 2021. 

The key terms of the facility, which is 
provided jointly by RBS Invoice Finance 
Limited, ABN AMRO Asset Based Finance 
N.V., UK Branch and Leumi ABL Limited, are 
set out below: 
I.  Maximum receivables financing facility 
of £90.0m over a four-and-a-half-year 
term, with a one-year extension option; 

II.  An Accordion option of up to an 
additional £15.0m, subject to  
lender approval;

III.  Security on all of the assets and 

undertakings of the Company and 
certain subsidiary undertakings; 
IV.  Interest accruing at 2.75% over SONIA, 

with a margin ratchet downward to 2.0%, 
dependent upon the Group’s leverage 
reducing to 3.0x; 

V.  A non-utilisation fee of 35% of the margin; 
VI.  Maximum net debt (averaged over a 

rolling three months) to EBITDA leverage 
covenant commencing at 5.95x followed 
by a gradual reduction to 4.0x by 
October 2023; and 

VII.  Minimum interest cover covenant of  
2.25x the last 12 months EBITDA to 
finance charges. 

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

26

ESG

Developing 
our approach 
towards ESG

At Staffline,  
we place great 
importance on 
the role we play 
in helping to 
support local 
communities and 
the environment 
surrounding us. 

We understand the 
importance of integrating 
our business values 
and operations to meet 
the expectations of our 
stakeholders. These include 
clients, employees, flexible 
workers, regulators, 
investors, suppliers, 
the community and the 
environment. We recognise 
that our social, economic 
and environmental 
responsibilities to these 
stakeholders are integral 
to our business. We aim 
to demonstrate these 
responsibilities through 
our actions and within our 
corporate policies.

Our Approach

Our Values

At Staffline, we believe that 
having an effective ESG strategy 
enhances our reputation and 
productivity.  

We have a clear set of values that drive 
everything we do. They influence the way 
we interact with staff, clients and candidates 
on a daily basis and can be measured in the 
strong results that we consistently achieve. 

We believe that embedding ESG principles 
is not only the right thing to do but the 
smart thing to do, and we recognise that 
ESG focused organisations deliver a greater 
impact and better bottom-line results. 

We continue to challenge ourselves to 
improve our ESG performance for the  
benefit of our colleagues, stakeholders  
and the communities in which we operate.

Teamwork: Working together across the 
business to achieve more for our customers.

Creativity: Solving problems and suggesting 
new ideas and insights.

Reliability: Fulfilling all our customer 
requirements, getting the job done.

Commitment: Demonstrating a relentless and 
driven ambition to exceed expectations.

Respect: Taking time to understand, trust and 
support each other to achieve shared success.

Integrity: Doing things the right way, for the 
right reason, ethically, honestly, every time.

Our Focus

Our focus is to make a  
positive difference to 
people’s lives and deliver 
social value to the 
communities in which  
we operate.  

Our committed teams work across the UK to 
deliver a range of private and public services 
to find and support people into employment, 
skills development, self-employment support, 
independent living, and prison education. 

We offer our employees clear and fair terms 
of employment and provide opportunities  
to enable their continual development  
and progression. 

We operate an equal opportunities policy for 
all employees and flexible workers, and ensure 
employees are treated with respect, without 
sexual, physical or mental harassment. 

We provide, and strive to maintain, a clean, 
healthy and safe working environment, and 
ensure our flexible workers are not subject to 
exploitation and modern slavery.

We uphold the values of honesty, integrity, 
transparency and fairness in our relationships 
with stakeholders. 

We strive to improve our environmental 
performance by fostering and encouraging 
initiatives that reduce waste, energy use 
and emissions.

Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

27

Our ESG 
Objectives

Area

Progress in 2021

Focus for 2022

Environmental

Social

•  GHG emissions
•  SECR
•  Taskforce on Climate 
related Financial 
Disclosures (TCFD)
•  Carbon offsetting

•  Social recruitment
•  Community-based 

activity

•  Modern slavery
•  DEI and equal 
opportunities
•  Gender pay gap
•  Health and safety

Property and estates
Business travel and 
accommodation
Technology and assets
Reporting and evaluation
TCFD preparations 
continue

Launch 
#GetBritainWorking 
initiative
Social value framework
Charity partnerships
Sustainable workforce
DEI and gender pay gap
Colleague engagement 
and wellbeing

Governance

•  Corporate governance 

and policies
•  ESG governance 
and structure

ESG roadmap
Stakeholder consultation
Climate change modelling 
and impact assessment

ESG and Business Strategy

At Staffline, we believe that 
ESG should not be a standalone 
compliance exercise. 

We recognise the importance of ensuring 
our ESG objectives are aligned to our 
corporate and governance strategies. 

Our ESG Committee representatives 
have deep knowledge of the Group  
and the three businesses within it to 
ensure our ESG strategy is linked to  
our wider business strategy and  
remains industry-relevant.

ESG in 
action

Our Social Recruitment Framework (“SRF”) 
helps employers realise their impact on 
society through social recruitment.

Social Recruitment is critical to tackling 
generational inequality in the labour market. 
We recognise that by using our employability 
and skills expertise and partnering 
with government employers and local 
organisations we can make a real difference 
to individual lives, communities, and wider 
society as we build back from the shock of 
Covid-19 on the economy.

Our community support services enable 
thousands of people to live independently 
across England and Wales each year. These 
trusted services and our dedicated teams 
empower people – at whatever stages of their 
lives – to live more independent, happier lives.

We deliver skills and training to ensure 
people can access the right employment 
and enhance their career prospects. We 
supported c.15,000 learners in 2021 with a 
90% success rate.

Our #FeedtheNation campaign helped 
25,000 people move into employment 
within three months of the start of the 
Covid-19 pandemic. And now our new 
#GetBritainWorking campaign in partnership 
with Staffline is closely supporting the 
Government’s Way to Work initiative.

Our PeoplePlus business is the largest 
independent provider of prison education 
services in the UK. We transform the lives of 
offenders through our education services and 
unique in-cell technology.

We deliver the Restart Scheme in Wales, Kent 
and the North East. In 2021, during the first 
six months of the Scheme, we saw over 6,500 
people sign up with us on the Programme and 
1,100 people start work.

In Scotland we are the largest employability 
provider delivering the FairStart Scotland 
contract, employability programmes and 
apprenticeships. Over 10,000 people have 
joined us on the FairStart Scotland service 
and 3,350 have started work since 2017.

Since 2015, we have helped over 50,000 
unemployed people achieve their 
dream of self-employment with an 
80% sustainment rate.

28

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

ESG continued

Developing our 
responsible approach 
to doing business

Social

At Staffline, we are committed to making a 
positive difference to society by delivering 
real social value in our local communities 
and ensuring our practices are socially 
responsible. Staffline’s purpose is to build 
and develop the most reliable integrated 
workforce in the country and be the leading 
creator of opportunities, jobs and new 
ideas in the employability, skills and justice 
sectors. One of the most tangible indicators 
of our commitment to enacting social value 
is demonstrated in the PeoplePlus side of our 
business, which brings hope, opportunity 
and targeted interventions to those in our 
communities seeking access to work, skills, 
support and other opportunities.

To support our social value agenda, we 
have established strong partnerships and 
strategic sponsorship links to help promote 
better social cohesion and community 
integration. We regularly collaborate and 
contribute to community-based forums and 
steering groups and share local intelligence 
with stakeholders, including the set-up of a 
Social Recruitment Advocacy Group with 
employers, chaired by the Rt Hon Anne Milton 
to advocate social recruitment practices.

In October 2021 and in collaboration 
with Cambridge University, we released 
our ‘Building Back Better: How Social 
Recruitment can drive a stronger economy 
and fairer society’ report, which looks at 
what the country needs to do to rebuild back 
‘better’ after the pandemic and ensure that 
people who already face a disadvantage in 
the labour market do not fall further to the 
back of the queue.

At Staffline, we recognise the need to adopt 
a demand-led approach in response to 
the concerning levels of unemployment – 
particularly for the long-term unemployed 
– and a re-shaped labour market to tackle 
persistent skills shortages and long-standing 
labour market inequalities, which the impact 
of Covid-19 has exacerbated.

In response to the concerns and 
opportunities highlighted in the ‘Building 
Back Better’ report and building on the 
success of our Social Recruitment practices 
and #FeedtheNation campaign, launched 
at the start of the Covid-19 pandemic, 
we are delighted to announce the launch 
of our #GetBritainWorking initiative. Our 
vision for this initiative is to address the UK’s 
labour market challenge by establishing an 
employment ‘bridge’ between the country’s 
unemployed and its unfilled frontline 
vacancies: creating economic and social 
value at a national level; securing futures 
at an individual level. Building on Staffline’s 
effective interview booking technology and 
connecting this with our Social Recruitment 
service, we will provide quick, easy and 
efficient support to prepare people for work 
and connect those looking for work with 
employer vacancies to provide guaranteed 
interviews as and when individuals are ready.

Our PeoplePlus business is the largest 
independent provider of prison education 
services in the UK. We deliver education 
to c.20,000 learner starts across 22 
establishments each year (with an 
achievement rate of 93%). We also provide 
a range of in-cell learning, employment 
support or careers information, advice and 
guidance across an additional 54 prisons. 
We are committed to transforming the lives 
of offenders through our education services, 
unique in-cell technology and content, and 
our community partnership relationships.

Please see the PeoplePlus ex-offenders 
case study on page 19.

Our community support services enable 
thousands of people to live independently 
across England and Wales each year.  
These trusted services and our dedicated 
teams empower people – at whatever stages 
of their lives – to live more independent, 
happier lives. Working with 26 Local 
Authorities we support in excess of 10,000 
people a year with direct payments.

We run the Carers’ Hub which is a free 
support service for unpaid carers in 
Gloucestershire. In 2021 we generated 
2,500 carer registrations.

In support of our local communities, our 
employees delivered 2,480 volunteer hours 
to local charities, schools and community-
based organisations. We also raised £85,000 
over the last four years for the Prince’s 
Trust and supported 490 service users 
with our YouCan wellbeing programme to 
build confidence and connections, reduce 
isolation, and improve wellbeing resilience.

54

Our in-cell learning Way-Out TV  
is shown in over 54 prisons.

Strategic Report
Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

29

Area

Progress in 2021

Aims for 2022

Social 
Recruitment

•  82% of candidates who are offered jobs 

Launch #GetBritainWorking initiative.

commence employment.

•  68% of candidates who attended interviews 

have been offered employment.

•  74% of candidates who attended courses were 

offered interviews.

•  Set up Social Recruitment Advocacy Group, 

chaired by Rt Hon Anne Milton, with employers 
to advocate social recruitment practices.

Build resilience and target social issues which 
create barriers to work for people.

Drive inclusive growth and engage hard to reach 
groups within communities.

Community-
Based Activity

Community 
Wellbeing

•  2,480 voluntary hours delivered to support 
community cohesion with local charities, 
schools and community organisations.
•  Raised £85k over the last four years for the 

Prince’s Trust.

Increase local charity partnerships to expand 
our ability to support community activity 
and fundraising.

Launch Social Value Framework.

•  YouCan wellbeing programme aimed at 

Expansion of wellbeing programme. 

building confidence, reducing isolation and 
offering practical advice and guidance 
delivered to 490 service users.

Promote and make good health practices a priority 
within local communities.

At Staffline, we understand the importance 
of integrating our business values and 
operations to meet the expectations of 
our stakeholders, including our clients, 
employees, government departments, flexible 
workers, regulators, investors and suppliers.

Developing our people is key, and our ethos 
aims to nurture talent at all levels and 
encourage self-development and internal 
promotion, which in turn aids succession 
planning and supports the strategic growth 
of the Group.

We recognise that our social and economic 
responsibilities to our local communities and 
stakeholders are integral to our business. We 
aim to demonstrate these responsibilities in 
our corporate policies and our commitments.

The Group regularly reviews talent and 
succession planning at all levels to support 
our business agility, enable further growth 
and be an employer of choice.

As a commercially-focused business, we 
drive a high-performance culture. We also 
regularly review our headcount to ensure that 
our lean operating model is fit for purpose.

Learning and Development
At Staffline, we believe in a culture of 
continuous learning. The development of 
our people remains a key strategic priority, 
evidenced through our learning and 
development schemes.

•  Our Learner Experience Platform provides 
accessible, targeted and tailored learning 
for all. In 2022, we will evolve our learning 
content further to include a new sales 
academy for permanent white-collar 
business professionals, supporting our 
‘beyond blue’ strategic priority.
•  A wide range of apprenticeships and 

specialist programmes enable our people 
to focus on their professional development.

•  Our leadership development programme 

aims to create a business fit for the 
future, increase leader accountability 
and strengthen our employment 
proposition.

•  Talent and succession planning across 
our business allow the creation of 
developmental opportunities and to track 
and action plan talent throughout all 
levels of the organisation.

•  Mental health and wellbeing training is 

available for leaders to ensure they have 
the right skills, capability and confidence 
to enable our people to speak out and 
support their teams.

The inclusivity of our culture and the mental 
health and wellbeing of our employees 
remains a top priority. In 2021, and in 
support of our social commitments and DEI 
agenda, we ran bimonthly campaigns with 
a specific focus on diversity, inclusion and 
wellbeing. We continue to share information 
on relevant topics, articles and videos via 
weekly communications.

 
30

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

ESG continued

Social continued

77%

Colleagues say they would 
recommend Staffline as a  
great place to work.

Employees
We communicate and engage with our 
people via various channels, including in-
person, virtual and electronic communication.

The key objective of our communication 
strategy is to enable and embed the delivery 
of the Group’s overall strategic performance, 
underpinned by a people-centred, inclusive 
and collaborative culture.

We continue to ensure the voice of our people 
is heard. Across all areas of the Group, we 
regularly survey our employees, acting on 
feedback via robust action plans. On average, 
77% of employees say they would recommend 
Staffline as a great place to work.

In 2021, our Group employee turnover was 
49.05%. This figure includes all employee 
attrition, redundancy, dismissals and TUPE 
out. Our Group average sickness absence 
rate, including long-term sick, was 1.78%.

The Board is committed to being a 
responsible employer and creating a working 
environment where employees are engaged, 
informed and involved. 

Employee Wellbeing  
During Covid-19
At Staffline, we provide our employees with 
the relevant tools and advice to support their 
overall wellbeing. In line with government 
advice, we implemented robust response 
protocols to ensure our people and customers 
remained safe throughout the pandemic.

Business Conduct and 
Relationships
The Board recognises the importance of a 
strong corporate culture that considers the 
best interests of its employees, business 
partners and shareholders, and its 
responsibilities to other external stakeholders. 
Our strong customer, business and community 
relationships are vital to our success. 

In 2021, Staffline worked closely with clients 
and employees to develop effective solutions 
to ensure the business could continue during 
the pandemic, including:
•  Work from home accessible and available 

for all our office-based employees;

•  Site-specific risk assessments;
•  Stringent application of social distancing 
and hygiene practices for on-site staff;
•  Appropriate PPE provided to necessary 

• 

staff and customers;
Investment in plastic screens and desk 
shields in appropriate locations; and
•  Protocols for self-isolation and contact 

tracing, among many others.

Diversity, Equity 
and Inclusion
At Staffline, we recognise the link between 
successful teams, culture and an inclusive, 
diverse and equal workforce.

The Group is committed to providing a work 
environment free from harassment and 
discrimination. We focus on building an 
inclusive environment where everyone can 
participate and achieve their potential.

We endeavour to treat everyone fairly 
in relation to job applications, training, 
promotion and career development. All roles 
have objective and transparent criteria.

The Board regularly reviews our progress 
against diversity and inclusion objectives 
and approves relevant policies annually. 
Our policies are freely and easily accessible 
to all our employees.

We regularly engage with our colleagues 
and listen to their feedback to ensure 
we can continue improving their working 
environment, strengthening our ethos, and 
being a great place to work.

C_GEN_Page

Strategic Report

31

Staffline is committed to leading this group 
which reports to Action Area 3 of the Scottish 
Government’s Human Trafficking and 
Exploitation Strategy. We have helped several 
victims to become survivors by supporting 
them in work. To ensure the initiative’s 
implementation and success, Staffline 
donated all of the funding and infrastructure.

Read our full Modern Slavery 
Statement on our website.

Equal Opportunities
Our policy is to provide employment equality 
to all and abide by equality laws. We 
promote a fair and harmonious recruitment 
process and will not discriminate or harass 
any person on the grounds of:
•  Gender (including gender reassignment)
•  Marital or family status
•  Religious belief or political opinion
•  Disability
•  Race or ethnic origin
•  Nationality
•  Sexual orientation
•  Age
•  Pregnancy or maternity

We are committed to:
•  Preventing any form of direct or indirect 

discrimination or victimisation;

•  Promoting equal opportunities for all;
•  Securing fair participation irrespective of 
religious or community background;

•  Promoting equal opportunities for people 

with disabilities;

•  Promoting equal opportunities for ethnic 

minorities;

•  Promoting a harmonious working 

environment where men and women  
are treated with respect and dignity  
and in which no form of intimidation  
or harassment will be tolerated;

•  Fulfilling all legal obligations under the 
relevant legislation and associated  
codes of practice; and

•  Taking any necessary positive/ 

affirmative action, including setting  
goals and timetables.

Modern Slavery
At Staffline, we are committed to protecting 
our workers from labour exploitation and 
modern slavery. We ensure basic employee 
rights are promoted and that all individuals 
feel connected to our organisation.

Staffline has a zero-tolerance approach 
to slavery and human trafficking. One of 
our highest priorities is to prevent Modern 
Slavery from happening. We recognise it 
is a complex, evolving crime, and through 
vigilance, caring, and the proactive 
approach of our employees and our supply 
chain, we strive to stamp it out.

We ensure we educate all permanent staff on 
how to ‘spot the signs’, including training via 
our new e-learning platform. We analyse and 
monitor key data to identify areas of risk and 
work closely with our sites, which are integral 
to quickly identifying possible victims.

In 2021, we assisted 33 Modern Slavery 
investigations with the authorities, which led 
to the identification of 54 potential victims. In 
addition, we helped the Police/Gangmasters 
and Labour Abuse Authority (GLAA) in their 
enquiries with a further 17 actual victims.

We work continuously to prevent unlicensed 
gangmasters from infiltrating our business 
and exploiting our workers and regularly 
engage with authorities and charities to 
tackle Modern Slavery, including Migrant 
Help, Hope for Justice, Spring Housing, 
The Jericho Foundation, The Sophie Hayes 
Foundation & City Hearts and the Police 
force. In addition, we collaborate with 
the Stronger Together initiative, using the 
Responsible Recruitment Toolkit to keep 
Modern Slavery high on ethical agendas.

Our Scottish business Brightwork founded 
the movement Scotland Against Modern 
Slavery (“SAMS”) in conjunction with the 
Scottish Government and Police Scotland. 
Over 35 businesses have now joined as 
members. The two core objectives of SAMS is 
to raise awareness of human trafficking and 
exploitation with the business community 
and support victims into permanent jobs 
through the Brightwork membership.

Please see the Glen Turner 
case study on page 14.

33

We assisted 33 Modern  
Slavery investigations  
with the authorities.

35

Over 35 businesses have  
now joined as members  
of our Scotland Against  
Modern Slavery movement.

GovernanceFinancial Statements32

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

ESG continued

Social continued

As part of our Group-wide ESG agenda, 
and our Diversity, Equity and Inclusivity 
objectives, we intend to raise the awareness 
of all ten facets of the DEI agenda, including 
a specific focus on key areas and measures 
relevant to each area of the business. We 
encourage career progression for all of 
our employees, regardless of gender, and 
this remains at the heart of our leadership 
team’s agenda.

All our employees are important to us. 
We remain committed to attracting and 
retaining the very best talent to the business 
and ensuring that gender is never a factor in 
decisions. Being a truly diverse and inclusive 
company is not only the right thing to do 
but is crucial to helping us grow, attract and 
retain talent, and strengthen our customer 
experience. We believe that having an 
inclusive workforce representing society is 
crucial to our long-term success.

Gender Pay Gap  
Reporting (“GPGR”)
Details of our Group’s gender pay gap 
reporting can be found on the Group’s 
website at: www.stafflinegroupplc.co.uk/
aboutus/gender-pay-gap-report/.

On 5 April 2021, the Group employed 
c. 2,000 monthly paid permanent 
employees and c. 33,300 weekly paid 
temporary workers. Overall, amalgamating 
all business areas and including the 
temporary workforce, the mean gender pay 
gap is 7.9% (2020: 8.2%). These results are 
affected by 94% (2020: 94%) of employees 
being temporary workers, of which 61% 
(2020: 66%) are male and 39% (2020: 34%) 

female. On their own, the temporary workers’ 
mean gender pay gap is 7.4% (2020: 7.7%). 
All are paid the same hourly rate for the 
same work, irrespective of gender. The gap 
derives from the mix of roles performed 
by the workers involved in the higher paid 
driving sector who are predominantly male. 
For the permanent employees, the mean 
gender pay gap is 16.4% (2020: 16.6%).

Health and Safety
Our employees’ health, safety and welfare 
and those we support every day remain 
our highest priority. Each of our operating 
divisions introduced strong controls and 
reporting arrangements in 2020 so that 
the direct and indirect impacts of the 
pandemic are managed appropriately and 
in adherence with government guidelines.

The Covid-19 pandemic tested our business 
resilience, and continuity arrangements have 
become part of normal operating practices. 
Our support teams monitor updates to 
government guidance. They communicate 
across the business in real-time, and our 
Covid-19 Risk Assessments at all sites are 
considered ‘living’ documents. They are 
routinely updated to ensure that everyone’s 
safety remains sharply in focus.

In 2021, a full review of the Group’s 
property estate was completed to 
strengthen our maintenance, servicing 
and repairs arrangements. 2022 schedules 
are in place and agreed with our trusted 
partner organisations to ensure the timely 
completion of all planned works in the year 
ahead. A refresh and update of some offices 
during 2021 has helped us to continue 

improving experiences in our working 
environments whilst keeping them secure 
and safe for everyone; this work will continue 
throughout 2022.

Due to an increased focus on the 
consistency and standard of reporting 
and support arrangements across all 
operating divisions, the total volume of 
reported matters has increased year-on-
year. In 2021, the Group had a total of 232 
reported incidents/accidents, 65 of which 
were reportable to the Health and Safety 
Executive (the “HSE”) or equivalent.

Accident data is collated and reported 
by each operating division monthly, and 
the Group’s Governance Director leads 
on assessing themes and learnings and 
reviews the data against national average 
comparators. Minor accidents (such as cuts 
and bruises) and near-miss incident reports 
make up nearly half of the total reported 
matters in 2021. ‘Slips/Trips/Falls (same 
level)’ is the second most common accident 
type, and ‘Struck by moving/falling object’ is 
ranked in third place. These reported matters 
are often from busy warehouse environments 
and can typically involve pallets and picking 
equipment/machinery incidents.

We’re doing more to review and support our 
colleagues working remotely and ensuring 
that we have the appropriate Display 
Screen Equipment (DSE) and home-working 
assessments in place. This work will continue 
throughout 2022 as the roll-out of an 
innovative assessment and support platform 
is ongoing across Recruitment GB.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

33

People, 
culture  
and values

Area

Progress in 2021

Aims for 2022

Colleague 
Engagement

•  Engagement surveys and action  

plans embedded. 

Continue to maintain and improve positive 
engagement scores.

Sustainable 
Workforce

Performance 
Management 
and Personal 
Development

Diversity, 
Equity and 
Inclusion

•  On average, 77% employees recommend 
Staffline Group as a great place to work.

•  Total employee turnover for 2021  

was 49.05%. 

•  Average sickness absence rate in 2021 
including long-term sick across the  
Group was 1.78%.

•  Performance and development plans  

in place for all leaders. 

•  Employee-wide performance 

management framework launched.
•  Focus on growing our own talent and 

promoting from within wherever possible.

•  Gender split 62% Women and 38% Men. 
•  Our business in Ireland was awarded the 

Diversity Mark NI bronze award. 
•  Unconscious bias and Health and 

Wellbeing training and support made 
available to all employees.

Through effective recruitment, reward and engagement 
strategy, continue to reduce levels of attrition and 
sickness absence.

All employees continue to have regular performance 
reviews and personal development plans.

Introduce regular talent review forums covering all 
management levels with clear succession plans in place.

Launch Group-wide DEI charter. 

Review gender split across all levels, including managers 
and leaders. 

Training for line managers on how to identify and 
support their people with mental health issues.

Colleague 
Wellbeing

•  All employees given access to Employee 

Assistance Programme. 

Employee benefits and support for financial, physical, 
mental and emotional wellbeing. 

•  Flexible working policies were updated  
to reflect the changing nature of the 
working environment. 

•  Health and Safety reporting arrangements 
continued to be robust and arrangements 
and continuity adequately tested via 
Covid-19 response.

Employee flexible working requests via hybrid 
working policy. 

Full reporting and monitoring of accidents and fatalities 
(#fatalities, Total-Recordable-Incident-Rate (“TRIR”). 

Long-Term-Injury-Frequency-Rate (“LTIFR”), with 
appropriate welfare/response arrangements in place.

34

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

ESG continued

Maintaining strong 
corporate governance 
and business ethics

Governance

Section 172 – Fulfilling 
our duty
Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 
requires the Directors to act in a way that 
they consider, in good faith, would be 
most likely to promote the success of the 
Company for the benefit of its members 
as a whole, and in doing so have regard 
(amongst other matters) to:

a)   The likely consequences of any decision 

in the long term;

b)  The interests of the Company’s employees;
c)  The need to foster the Company’s 

business relationships with suppliers, 
customers and others;

d)  The impact of the Company’s operations 
on the community and the environment;

e)  The desirability of the Company 
maintaining a reputation for high 
standards of business conduct; and

f)  The need to act fairly as between 

members of the Company.

In the decisions taken during the year ended 
31 December 2021, the Directors have acted 
in the way they consider to be in good faith, 
most likely to promote the success of the 
Company and its continuing reputation for 
high standards of business conduct, and for 
the benefit of its stakeholders, having regard 
to the stakeholders and matters set out in 
Section 172 of the UK Companies Act 2006.

Staffline is fully committed to ensuring 
we have a robust approach to corporate 
governance arrangements and matters. 
Information about Staffline’s activities, 
metrics and targets relating to corporate 
governance but not directly linked to our ESG 
agenda can be found on pages 50 to 55.

In recognition of the importance of ESG, in 
2021, the Board formed an ESG Committee 
made up of senior leaders from across the 
Group who together represent a wide range 
of functions relevant to the ESG agenda, 
including health, safety and environmental; 
people, social and community; risk and 
governance; and technology/systems.

The Committee’s Terms of Reference include 
the following key responsibilities:
•  To assist the Board in developing and 

regularly reviewing the Group’s strategy 
relating to ESG matters and in setting 
relevant KPIs;

•  To develop and regularly review the 

policies, programmes, practices, targets 
and initiatives of the Group relating 
to ESG matters ensuring they remain 
effective and up to date and consistent 
with good industry practice;

•  To provide oversight of the Group’s 
management of ESG matters and 
compliance with relevant legal and 
regulatory requirements, including 
applicable rules and principles of 
corporate governance, and applicable 
industry standards;

•  To report on these matters to the 

Board and, where appropriate, make 
recommendations to the Board; and
•  To report as required to the shareholders 
of the Company on the activities and 
remit of the Committee.

Area

Progress in 2021

Aims for 2022

ESG strategy development

•  Establishment of ESG Committee 
and setting of Terms of Reference.

Climate change scenario modelling 
and impact assessment.

Development of roadmap, strategy and 
supporting governance infrastructure.

•  Stakeholder mapping.

Stakeholder consultation.

• 

Initial impact assessments.

Preparation and implementation.

ESG-related stakeholder 
engagement

Taskforce on Climate related 
Financial Disclosure (TCFD) 
reporting

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

35

Data Security
The PeoplePlus division has held 
accreditations including ISO27001 and 
Cyber Essentials for some time, and these 
will be extended across the Group alongside 
working towards System and Organisation 
Controls (SOC2) certification. After merging 
technology practices across the Group 
during 2020, Staffline has positioned itself 
to expand the deployment of a portfolio of 
cyber and information security management 
solutions and controls across all divisions. 
These include:
•  Appointing an experienced Data 

Protection Officer in each division;
•  Maintaining a full suite of Information 
Security and associated policies that  
are a mandated component of new 
starter induction and are refreshed at 
least annually;

•  Establishing divisional Information 

Security Working Groups to oversee data 
security planning and interactions with 
the Information Commissioner’s Office;

•  Maintaining a range of ongoing 

Information Security training solutions, 
including e-learning, phishing and social 
engineering campaigns; and

•  Deploying a suite of systems based on 
market-leading technologies, including 
Microsoft Azure and Microsoft Sentinel, 
to safeguard the integrity of Staffline’s 
systems and data.

Business Ethics and Culture
Strong and effective governance is 
clearly identified as one of Staffline 
Group’s strategic priorities. The Group’s 
governance arrangements saw significant 
changes during 2020 with, among other 
things, the appointment of a Head of 
Internal Audit and implementation of a 
Group-wide risk management process. 
Continued strengthening of the governance 
environment in 2021 saw the appointment of 
three new NEDs and an in-house Company 
Secretary and implementation of a suite of 
new Group-level policies to replace existing 
divisional policies. These policies comprise:
•  Anti-Bribery Policy
•  Anti-Fraud Policy
•  Anti-Facilitation of Tax Evasion Policy
•  Anti-Money Laundering Policy
•  Conflicts of Interest Policy
•  Competition Law Policy
•  Whistle-blowing Policy

The above policies are all sponsored at 
Board level. They form part of mandatory 
training for new starters and annual refresher 
training for all employees or targeted groups 
of employees in relevant roles in the case 
of more specialist topics. Clearly defined 
procedures by which any employee can 
access relevant information about these 
policies and, if necessary, raise concerns 
are now in place, including an externally 
operated confidential reporting hotline.

All divisions maintain compliance functions 
that report outside the core operational 
management structure to provide 
independent monitoring of compliance with 
internal procedures and relevant regulations.

Ownership and accountability are key 
components of performance management 
and personal development processes. Certain 
operational management bonuses in Staffline 
Ireland are linked to compliance performance 
as measured by internal audit findings.

Professional Integrity and 
Regulatory/Legal Exposure
The Board has established a clear culture  
of high ethical standards and accountability, 
which is reflected in the policies referenced 
above and the establishment of reporting 
channels through which concerns can  
be raised.

Significant effort has been put into 
strengthening divisional control 
environments, particularly around 
accounting and finance during this period, 
and all senior finance staff are professionally 
qualified. The GB Recruitment business 
has an ongoing investment programme 
to develop operational management 
information, which will support the 
continuous improvement of data quality. 
Financial reports undergo multiple levels 
of review, including variance analysis as 
part of month-end processes and material 
balances, and external reporting and 
announcements of financial results are 
subject to external audit.

Legal and regulatory risk, including 
compliance with existing legislation and the 
potential impact of future developments, 
is a standing item on divisional and Group 
risk registers. The Group uses a panel of 
legal firms to provide advice when required, 
and membership of trade bodies enables 
participation in consultations regarding 
future legislation and regulation. Professional 
services firms provide regular updates on 
regulatory developments and are engaged to 
deliver specific pieces of work.

36

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

ESG continued

Environment

Energy Consumption. Waste. Travel. Sustainable Materials.

At Staffline, we place great 
importance on the role we 
play in helping to support the 
environment surrounding us, 
and we recognise that our 
environmental responsibilities 
are integral to our business.

We aim to demonstrate these responsibilities 
through our actions and within our 
corporate policies. 

During 2020-21, we significantly reduced 
emissions and energy usage across the 
business, with the Covid-19 pandemic being 
the catalyst behind this change. Our aim 
now is not simply to show year-on-year 
improvements in our business efficiency  
but also to ensure that we don’t return to 

pre-pandemic usage and emissions levels, 
thus helping us sustain as much of the short-
term improvements into the medium and 
long term. 

We have examples of strong practices within 
our operating divisions. Our strategy and 
supporting action plans will help us achieve 
greater cohesion and consistency in our 
approach across the Group during 2022 
and beyond.

Type

Illustration of 2022 areas of focus

Property 
and Estates

•  Environmental commitments for landlords/agents 
•  Waste management plans 
•  Recycling arrangements at all direct operational sites. 

Business  
Travel and 
Accommodation

Technology 
and Assets

•  Continued use of alternative travel to work schemes 
•  Broader policy considerations for hybrid/electric vehicles 
• 

Introduction of carbon off-set schemes. 

•  Energy-efficient asset deployment with appropriate recycling arrangements 
•  Continued migration to Cloud infrastructure with accelerated reductions in  

energy usage.

Reporting  
and Evaluation

•  Strengthening reporting arrangements across the divisions (underpinned with ISO 

certification) to improve communications and to measure our success against the usage 
targets in place.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

37

The reporting and monitoring arrangements 
in place for current emissions for the sources 
included in Scope 1 and 2 of the Greenhouse 
Gas Protocol (GHG) are embedded. Further 
work will continue in 2022 to allow regular 
usage reviews to occur.

related initiatives such as carbon off-setting 
schemes within our direct operations, and 
how our network of trusted supply chain 
partners is supporting Staffline to achieve  
its environmental objectives in 2022  
and beyond. 

Preparations will continue in 2022 in 
readiness for the 2023 implementation 
timeline to enable further reporting on 
a defined subset of Scope 3 emissions 
as the business prepares for Taskforce 
on Climate related Financial Disclosures 
(“TCFD”) and reporting more substantively 
on environmental matters, including any 

The data covers energy usage across all 
large UK entities in the Group. Energy usage 
from subsidiaries outside of the UK is outside 
the scope of this report and therefore 
excluded from the figures. 

2019

123.47

351.37

474.84

2020

48.36

246.98

295.34

2021

82.02

187.42

269.44

2,046,247

1,322,350

1,330,350

–

0.19

–

0.14

–

0.12

296
 tCO2e

2020

270 
 tCO2e

2021

Greenhouse 
gas emissions – 
Streamlined Energy 
and Carbon  
Reporting (“SECR”)

Disclosures are made in accordance with 
Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting 
guidelines. The data included covers the 
FY19, FY20 and FY21 financial years (with 
the latter having some usage assumptions 
applied for the final part of the year).

UK Energy Use
Consumption in metric tonnes CO2e

Gas (Scope 1)

Electricity (Scope 2)

Total consumption in metric tonnes CO2e

Total energy use in kWh

Efficiency ratio:

Scope 1 & Scope 2 emissions in tonnes CO2e per UK employee

Total tCO2e

500

450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

475 
 tCO2e

2019

The methodology used to calculate our emissions is based on SECR requirements in accordance with the principles of ISO14064 and GHG 
Reporting Protocols. It has been calculated using the revised carbon conversion factors published by BEIS for each of the years noted.

Area

Progress in 2021

Aims for 2022

Emissions Reporting

Carbon Offsetting

•  Systems and processing in place  
for Scope 1 and Scope 2 reporting; 
planning for Scope 3 reporting 
completed.

Scope 3 reporting  
arrangements introduced.

•  Research completed to better 
understand carbon offsetting  
initiatives and options for 
the business.

Introduce a carbon offsetting scheme 
within the business to start measuring 
impact and return.

38

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Principal Risks and Uncertainties

Managing 
our risks 

The Board’s view of the key risks and uncertainties to which the Group is 
exposed is set out below, with an indication of the year-on-year change in 
the level of risk exposure as follows:

 Increased since prior year

 Reduced since prior year

 Similar to prior year

Liquidity risk and compliance  
with banking facility agreements 

Risk

Mitigation 

On 20 May 2021, the Company 
and certain fellow subsidiary 
undertakings entered into a new 
£90m Receivables Financing 
Agreement (“RFA”) to replace 
the existing Group banking 
arrangements. Subject to potential 
extension, if agreed by all parties, 
the RFA has a termination date of 
1 December 2025.

The Group has prepared financial forecasts 
covering the period to 31 December 2023 
which show significant headroom is 
expected to be available within the existing 
facilities and maintain compliance with the 
relevant covenants for the full period of the 
forecasts. The Board’s confidence in the 
forecasting process has been bolstered by 
the Group’s actual performance during the 
second half of the year.

Under the RFA, the Group must 
comply with certain undertakings 
and two principal financial 
covenants, which cover EBITDA to 
net debt leverage and EBITDA to 
interest cover. These covenants have 
been tested monthly from September 
2021 and will be tested quarterly 
from 31 December 2022 subject to 
compliance prior to that date.

The Group Finance team forecasts and 
monitors cash flows and banking facilities 
on a daily and weekly basis and maintains 
compliance with the other information 
undertakings required under the facility. 
The Group also prepares a rolling 13-week 
cashflow forecast on a weekly basis to 
identify potential pinch points and ensure 
that sufficient cash reserves (including 
undrawn facilities) are in place to meet the 
short-term needs of the business. These 
forecasts and the potential availability of 
additional financing facilities are closely 
monitored by the Board.

The Board of Directors of Staffline Group 
plc regards effective monitoring and 
management of exposure to risk as critical  
to the delivery of the Group’s strategic 
objectives and the creation of sustainable 
shareholder value.

The Group is exposed to a variety of risks and 
uncertainties that require ongoing monitoring 
and management in order to mitigate against 
adverse impacts on long-term performance. 
The most significant risks to which, in the 
opinion of the Directors, the Group is exposed 
are described below, along with an overview 
of relevant mitigation measures that are 
either in place or planned and an indication 
of the year-on-year change in the level of  
risk exposure.

Risk management framework
A variety of policies, systems and processes 
are in place to monitor and respond 
effectively to the risks and uncertainties  
faced by the Group. Following the 
comprehensive review of risk management 
processes that was completed in 2020 
a robust, standardised approach to risk 
management was fully rolled out across the 
Group during 2021.

Risks are evaluated based on the likelihood 
of occurrence and their potential impacts on 
the Group, which are considered in terms of 
financial performance, liquidity, reporting, 
regulatory compliance and reputation. Risk 
registers are regularly reviewed and updated 
at divisional level and consolidated to provide 
a Group view annually as part of the strategic 
planning and budgeting process. Both the risk 
register process and its outputs are formally 
reviewed by the Audit Committee and  
the Board.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

39

Legal and Regulatory Environment  
and Compliance

Risk

Mitigation 

Staffline actively engages with customers, regulators, external 
professional advisers and industry bodies to discuss the 
requirements and implications of relevant regulations and  
working practices. 

In-house compliance audit teams monitor compliance with laws 
and regulations such as ‘right to work’ checks and Agency Worker 
Regulations through both planned audits and investigation of 
exceptions identified by data analysis.

New and existing employees in the Recruitment businesses are 
trained on the NMW regulations and sites that pay National 
Minimum Wage are regularly audited by in-house compliance 
teams to ensure that practice is compliant with the relevant 
regulations. An ongoing monitoring process has been established 
and emphasis is placed on sites that are considered higher risk due 
to factors such as the nature of operations. 

Steps have been taken to mitigate any risks associated with 
changes to legislation in Northern Ireland and the Republic of 
Ireland, including restricting use of zero hours contracts wherever 
possible and in line with best practice. 

2021 has seen a strengthening of the Group’s control environment 
through the introduction of Group-wide standard policies covering 
areas including bribery, fraud, competition law and prevention 
of facilitation of tax evasion. These policies, are supported by 
mandatory training for relevant employees. 

Ensuring a periodic horizon scan for known or possible regulatory 
changes is an important component of the Group’s risk 
management process.

The Group operates in a fluid and increasingly complex legal 
and regulatory environment, particularly in relation to the supply 
of temporary labour. Key elements of this environment include 
immigration laws, which establish ‘right to work’ rules, Agency 
Worker Regulations, National Minimum Wage (“NMW”) regulations, 
gangmaster licensing regulations, Modern Slavery regulations and, 
during 2020 and 2021, Covid-19 related furlough schemes.

The complex and varied operational environments that exist across 
the Group mean there is a risk of inadvertent breach of one or 
more of these laws or regulations. 

The announcement in June 2021 of the UK Government’s intention 
to establish a single enforcement body to regulate various aspects 
of the labour market did not set out any clear timelines but, if 
implemented, may significantly change both monitoring and 
enforcement of workers’ rights. Whilst this is not expected to have 
a significant impact on Staffline, it may well affect the competitive 
environment in which the Group operates. 

Abolition of free movement from EU countries has had an adverse 
impact in certain sectors of the labour market and there is ongoing 
uncertainty around future immigration arrangements, trading 
relationships between the UK and the EU and potential impacts 
on our customers’ supply chains. The continuation of freedom 
of movement across the Irish border has created difficulties for 
Staffline Ireland in reconciling two sets of regulations in respect 
of workers’ rights and has created concerns about continued 
availability of temporary workers in Northern Ireland. 

Reviews of statutory entitlements including introduction of 
statutory sick pay in the Republic of Ireland are also expected this 
year. Potential future legislative changes are expected to affect 
zero hours contracts and workers’ rights under such contracts in 
Northern Ireland. 

The above and other recent regulatory changes affecting the 
Group, such as the extension of IR35 to the private sector in April 
2021 and increases in National Insurance rates from April 2022, 
have required deployment of resource to assess impacts, design 
and implement responses and monitor ongoing compliance. 

The costs of investigating and remediating any regulatory  
breach and, where relevant, fines or other penalties would  
reduce profitability. The ongoing costs of compliance in terms  
of process design and operation, monitoring and audit are built 
into customer pricing.

40

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Principal Risks and Uncertainties continued

Economic conditions  

Risk

Mitigation

In addition to the specific economic impacts of Covid-19 referenced 
below, any downturn or unexpectedly slow recovery in economic 
conditions in the UK and/or the Republic of Ireland could have an 
adverse impact on consumer confidence, leading to a knock-on 
effect on our customers’ businesses and their labour requirements.

Staffline provides temporary labour into a wide range of 
organisations in both the UK and Ireland. Sectors such as food, food 
logistics, online retail and public services are generally more resilient 
than, for example, automotive or travel and tourism, lessening the 
overall impact of adverse economic conditions on the Group. 

Whilst any increase in unemployment in the short to medium term 
might increase the availability of labour, discretionary spending by 
consumers may be adversely affected. An increase in the number 
of unemployed might also make securing a return to work by the 
long-term unemployed even more of a challenge.

Flexible labour resourcing has historically provided an important 
mitigation strategy in times of increased uncertainty for the 
Group’s customers, as use of temporary labour provides the 
flexibility required to meet their end customers’ changing demands. 

Planned increases in National Insurance in the UK and widespread 
increases in the costs of energy and food in particular, are likely 
to lead to ongoing pressure for pay increases and risk driving 
inflation. Lifting of government restrictions on public sector wages 
towards the end of 2021 may further increase wage expectations 
in the private sector.

Increases in government spending over the short to medium-term 
were announced during 2021, but longer-term spending plans are 
an area of ongoing uncertainty, not least due to the impact of 
high levels of taxation and the possibility of a change in the UK’s 
political landscape at the next General Election. 

The economic situation in Europe also affects how attractive the 
UK is relative to workers’ home countries and/or other EU countries. 
Short-term relaxation of immigration controls to address chronic 
labour shortages in sectors such as hospitality and agriculture/
horticulture may combine with improving economic conditions to 
increase the supply of EU workers in the UK market.

Recent events in Ukraine have led to additional economic 
uncertainty and increased volatility in energy prices. The situation 
continues to develop and neither medium nor long-term impacts, 
whether regional or global, can be predicted with any degree  
of certainty.

Whilst there are early signs that some customers are rebalancing 
their workforces to decrease reliance on temporary labour in 
a tight labour market, this provides opportunities for ‘temp to 
perm’ models under which Staffline sources workers and supplies 
them to customers for a defined period after which they transfer 
to employment by the customer. Whatever resourcing model 
Staffline’s customers employ, we work closely with them to 
understand their expected future needs and plan accordingly. 

The back-to-work education and skills support services delivered 
by PeoplePlus could see increased demand should unemployment 
rates rise in the short to medium term. Significant government 
funding in these two areas has been made available through 
the UK Government’s multi-channel ‘Plan for Jobs’, which was 
originally announced in 2020 and saw a further £500m of funding 
announced in Q4 2021. 

The Group takes a cautious approach to revenue forecasting. The 
business model operated by PeoplePlus, the division that is most 
reliant on public sector contracts, seeks to minimise fixed costs 
that could not be avoided should government funding undergo a 
significant reduction in future.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

41

Impact of Covid-19 pandemic

Risk

Mitigation

As referenced elsewhere, Staffline works closely with its customers 
to understand their expected future needs in both the short and 
longer term. 

Staffline has continued to monitor Covid-related absence and 
provides regular updates to employees and workers to ensure they 
are aware of current rules and guidance. 

Activity levels and sickness absence are closely monitored to 
identify potential trends and alternative scenarios are modelled to 
assess the potential impact on the Group.

Covid-19 had an ongoing impact across the global economy 
throughout 2021. The effect on the Group’s business has varied, 
with food, driving, logistics and e-commerce sectors continuing 
to experience strong demand in 2021. However, the retail, 
manufacturing and automotive sectors were more challenging.

Some level of continued disruption is to be expected but 
vaccination programmes in the UK and other countries should 
reduce the economic and societal impacts of any future 
outbreaks. However, UK and devolved governments’ responses 
to the emergence of new Covid variants and the withdrawal of 
employment support schemes may have an adverse impact on 
customer confidence in the short to medium term.

The divergence of regulations in relation to vaccine passports 
between Northern Ireland and the Republic of Ireland has affected 
vaccine take-up with lower uptake in the former. This has impacted 
operations in the Irish recruitment business. A lack of clarity and 
consistency in the management of Covid-19 has also affected 
consumer and business confidence in Northern Ireland.

Covid-related travel restrictions in place during much of 2020 and 
2021 stopped many EU workers returning to their home countries for 
family visits and holidays. However, there are signs that workers are 
now travelling more as restrictions have been reduced but it remains 
to be seen whether these workers choose to return to the UK as a 
permanent place of residence and to re-enter the workforce.

42

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Principal Risks and Uncertainties continued

Customer contracts and service delivery

Risk

Mitigation

Staffline operates in a highly competitive marketplace with 
demand for temporary labour exceeding supply, rising costs and 
legislative and regulatory factors that could lead to downward 
pressure on margins and additional challenges around Staffline’s 
contract renewals and pipeline conversion rates. Unrealistic or 
unsustainable pricing of tenders by competitors to secure new 
business is also a threat.

Much of the Group’s business is derived through long-term 
contracts or framework agreements. It is therefore essential that 
contractual service levels are achieved and maintained to secure 
contract renewals or extensions. A healthy pipeline of potential new 
business is also vital to ensure both growth and diversity across a 
range of business sectors to ensure resilience.

PeoplePlus delivers services through a variety of national and 
regional schemes aimed primarily at improving skills in the 
workforce and employability of those currently out of work.

Following PeoplePlus’ success in securing three contracts under 
the UK Government’s ‘Restart’ programme during 2021 there has 
been significant focus on contract implementation to meet tight 
timescales and challenging performance targets to avoid  
incurring penalties. 

The funding schemes under which PeoplePlus delivers services 
are funded by the UK Government, Welsh and Scottish devolved 
governments and local government bodies, and have complex 
eligibility rules to control the use of public funds. PeoplePlus’ 
responsibility extends to oversight of delivery partners’ compliance 
with scheme rules. 

Meeting the standards required by Ofsted in England, Estyn in 
Wales and Skills Development Scotland, who collectively oversee 
education-related services provided by PeoplePlus, is an important 
‘licence to trade’ for the PeoplePlus business. 

The effects of general economic conditions and Covid-19’s impact 
on availability of labour and their implications for Staffline’s ability 
to fulfil customers’ requirements are discussed elsewhere.

The Group’s strategy is to grow sales with the right customers, i.e. 
those that pay appropriate pay rates to workers, focus on retention 
by putting the worker first and provide appropriate margins for our 
market-leading services. In order to achieve this, Staffline has: 
(i) 

   Produced a value proposition chain that clearly explains why 
a customer should choose Staffline and pay more to secure a 
differentiated service; 
Invested in market-leading technology; and 

(ii) 
(iii)  Established a Commercial team to work with divisional 

directors to analyse the current customer portfolio and drive 
efforts to secure strategic new business wins. 

A programme of planned exits from under-performing contracts in 
the Recruitment GB business was completed during the first half  
of 2021. 

The Group has been investing in its branch network in the 
Recruitment businesses in both GB and Ireland and has continued 
to pursue its digital transformation programme in 2021 to increase 
its presence and profile in the labour market and speed up the 
process of attracting, onboarding and deploying workers. 

PeoplePlus maintains robust quality control and compliance 
monitoring processes that operate independently of operational 
management. These include due diligence checks on service 
delivery partners, ongoing monitoring of partners’ compliance 
and a Quality Improvement Board that provides external scrutiny 
though its independent Chair. 

Regular internal and external audits of PeoplePlus’ compliance 
against scheme rules are undertaken. An historical issue involving 
incomplete records, predominantly during 2019 and relating to 
a specific contract, was identified by an audit carried out during 
2021. Business process changes implemented during 2020 had 
resolved the underlying control weaknesses. All other services 
inspected by funding bodies within the last two years have been 
found to meet the required standards apart from minor exceptions. 

Accreditations such as ISO9001, ISO27001 and Cyber Essentials  
Plus are maintained and ISO14001 accreditation will be sought 
during 2022.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

43

IT systems, data security and  
cyber threats

Risk

Mitigation

Staffline is, like all large-scale businesses, both within and outside 
the staffing and recruitment sector, reliant on IT systems to operate 
and support its business activities. Failure or disruption due to old 
or poorly maintained hardware or software, or deliberate cyber-
attack, could result in serious business interruption.

A Group-level IT Disaster Recovery Plan is in place and would 
be invoked in the event of critical interruption to one or more of 
Staffline’s core IT services. This would entail the wholesale transfer 
via tried and tested backup solutions of all core technical assets 
and services to the Group’s secondary estate, which is maintained 
as an exact replica of the primary estate. 

IT infrastructure and both core operational and ancillary support 
systems need to sufficiently support the business in its day-to-
day operations whilst also supporting the Group’s growth and 
diversification plans.

The Recruitment division carries out weekly payroll runs for our 
temporary labour workforce. A failure in key operational systems, 
the payroll system or BACS software could lead to workers 
not being paid correctly and/or on time and to consequent 
reputational damage.

PeoplePlus, through its Independent Living Services activities, 
helps over 10,000 people across England and Wales manage their 
personal health budgets and pay for the services they require. Any 
systems failure could have significant adverse impacts on service 
users and lead to reputational damage.

Disaster recovery capability in relation to core IT systems is 
tested regularly and resilience will be further improved through 
the consolidation and re-platforming of data centre services and 
transition to greater use of cloud-based services during 2022. 

Covid-19 has tested the Recruitment divisions’ ability to run 
temporary worker payrolls remotely and this operating model 
is now well established. Key payrolls could, as a last resort, be 
run and paid via manual processes if necessary due to extended 
system outages.

The Group’s cyber security arrangements have been fundamentally 
improved during 2021 and this investment will continue during 
2022 in the form of both additional capabilities and changes to 
remediate known vulnerabilities. PeoplePlus will pursue SOC2 
certification alongside maintaining established ISO27001 and 
Cyber Essentials Plus certifications.

Both business interruption and cyber insurance policies are 
maintained. These may not fully cover all risks and potential  
losses, but the Board is satisfied with the scope and level of 
mitigation provided.

44

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Principal Risks and Uncertainties continued

PeoplePlus contract portfolio

Risk

Mitigation

The PeoplePlus division is dependent on large, often complex, 
public sector contracts. Individual contract wins or losses could 
have a material impact on the Group’s revenue and profitability. 
Failure to secure key contracts, poor or unsuccessful mobilisation 
of new contracts and/or poor contract performance could have an 
adverse impact on the Group’s profitability and reputation. 

PeoplePlus’ business development effort is focused on delivering 
sustainable growth in its core markets. 

In relation to commissioned services, the business has a strong bid 
management capability that is focused on maintaining tight bid 
disciplines. 

PeoplePlus expects to see continued demand for its services 
with an associated requirement for effective mobilisation of new 
contracts and strong contract performance controls across its two 
key markets of employability services and adult skills, with notable 
growth opportunities for 2022 arising in the Prison Education sector.

In relation to non-commissioned services, we have developed a 
number of capabilities, notably our Social Recruitment Framework, 
which provide an increasing platform for high-margin growth 
through the provision of ancillary services to the wider provider 
community within these sectors. 

PeoplePlus also has well-established contract mobilisation and 
contract management models through which we have successfully 
implemented and delivered high-profile government contracts 
to scale performance over several years. Notably, in 2021, this 
incorporated our mobilisation and delivery of DWP’s flagship 
Restart programme across three Contract Package Areas. 

Mitigation

The Board has established, and is committed to supporting, an 
ESG Committee comprising senior managers from across the 
Group. The Committee is tasked with helping the Board shape 
its ESG strategy, recommending ESG management frameworks 
that are appropriate to Staffline’s business and defining relevant 
performance metrics and targets. 

Further information about the ESG Committee’s remit and Staffline’s 
ESG-related actions and targets is set out in pages 26 and 27. 

Sustainability

Risk

Climate change and the wider economic, social and governance 
(“ESG”) agenda present the Group with significant uncertainties 
in the medium to long term. There are also known challenges, such 
as developing monitoring and reporting processes to comply with 
increasing disclosure requirements.

Staffline’s own business operations produce relatively low levels 
of greenhouse gas emissions (see pages 36 and 37), but many 
of the Group’s customers will be required to make more extensive 
changes to their business models and/or operations, which may 
affect their future labour requirements in terms of both numbers of 
workers and their skill sets.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

45

Talent

Risk

Mitigation

Attracting and retaining the talent required to maintain and 
develop Staffline’s business is an ongoing requirement but has 
become more challenging as the UK economy recovers from the 
impacts of Covid-19.

The Board recognises the importance of establishing Staffline as an 
employer of choice for high-quality candidates. Remuneration and 
benefits packages are regularly benchmarked against the market 
to ensure the Group’s proposition remains competitive. 

Many organisations have restructured and reorganised in response 
to Covid-19, and employees’ expectations around pay, benefits and 
working conditions have shifted. Competition for high-quality talent 
is intense and, whilst the Group’s white-collar staffing activities 
have seen some benefit, the risk that existing and/or potential 
employees could be attracted away from Staffline has increased.

Succession planning and future resourcing needs are kept under 
regular review. Discretionary pay awards may be made where 
specific high performers are seen as at risk of being attracted to 
roles outside Staffline. 

Employees are encouraged to undertake personal and professional 
development activities, and coaching and mentoring programmes 
are in place alongside regular performance reviews, both formal 
and informal. 

All three Staffline divisions carry out annual employee engagement 
surveys. Findings are shared with the senior management teams 
and action plans are communicated to all staff. 

The Board has in place Remuneration and Nomination  
Committees to ensure appropriate governance of senior pay 
awards and promotions. 

Further information about Staffline’s employee engagement, 
development and retention programmes is set out in pages  
28 to 33.

46

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Governance

Inside this 
section

Governance

47  Chairman’s Introduction
48  Board of Directors
50  Corporate Governance Report
56  Report on Remuneration
60  Report of the Directors
64  Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities
65 

Independent Auditor’s Report

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

47

Corporate Governance Statement

Our vision & values

Our vision is to be a world 
class recruitment and training 
Group, the clear market 
leader and trusted partner 
known for excellent service 
and integrity, driven forward 
by digital innovation.

Teamwork
Working together across 
the business to achieve 
more for our customers

Respect
Taking time to 
understand, trust and 
support each other to 
achieve shared success

Commitment
Demonstrating a 
relentless and driven 
ambition to exceed 
expectations

Our
values

Reliability
Fulfilling all our 
customer requirements, 
getting the job done

Creativity
Solving problems 
and suggesting new 
ideas and insights 

Integrity
Doing things the right 
way, for the right reason, 
ethically, honestly,  
every time

Chairman’s 
Introduction

I am pleased to present the Group’s 
Corporate Governance Report for the 
year ended 31 December 2021. 

As an AIM listed company, Staffline is 
required to apply the Quoted Companies 
Alliance Corporate Governance Code for 
Small and Mid-Size Quoted Companies 
(the “QCA Code”). In doing so, we have 
established internal governance processes 
that reflect best practice. Ultimate 
accountability for the governance of 
Staffline lies with our Board of Directors, 
the majority of whom are Non-Executive 
Directors, who can draw on their 
considerable experience in diverse areas of 
business. The Board is supported by Audit, 
Remuneration and Nominations Committees, 
of which the Chair and the majority of 
members are Non-Executive Directors. Our 
corporate values of teamwork, respect, 
commitment, reliability, creativity and 
integrity are driven by the Board and are at 
the heart of all our processes and decisions. 

Since my appointment as Executive 
Chairman on 25 April 2020, the Company 
has transformed the Board and made 
significant progress in improving the 
Group’s governance, operational and 
financial processes. The Group also further 
strengthened its financial position. On 10 
June 2021, the Group completed a placing, 
subscription and open offer, raising gross 
proceeds of £48.4m. Additionally, the 
Group’s debt facilities were refinanced. 
The combined refinancing has transformed 
Staffline’s balance sheet. These actions 

were achieved against the backdrop of the 
global Covid-19 pandemic, which created 
both opportunities and challenges across 
Staffline. During the pandemic, ensuring the 
health and safety of our workforce has, and 
continues to be, the Board’s priority. 

The following pages of this Corporate 
Governance Report set out how the Group 
has complied with the “QCA Code” and the 
activities of each Board Committee and the 
actions that we have taken to strengthen 
further our internal processes and controls. 

Ian Lawson
Chairman
21 March 2022

One of our strategic priorities during 
2021 was improving Staffline’s corporate 
governance including the strengthening of 
the Board. On 1 January 2021, I was pleased 
to welcome Ian Starkey and Catherine 
Lynch to the Board as Independent Non-
Executive Directors. We have already started 
to benefit from their highly relevant skill 
sets. Ian has brought a wealth of audit and 
financial management and Catherine, 
significant people experience. Daniel Quint 
was appointed as Chief Financial Officer on 
1 February 2021, having joined the Group as 
Interim Chief Financial Officer in December 
2019. Other changes during the year 
included the election of Tom Spain as Non-
Executive Director at the Company’s Annual 
General Meeting on 28 July 2021. 

On 1 January 2021 and at the conclusion 
of the Board transformation, I became 
Non-Executive Chair. I firmly believe that we 
have a strong, independent, highly qualified 
and diverse Board, actively engaged in the 
strategic decision-making and oversight of 
the Group. I look forward to working with 
my colleagues on the Board to strengthen 
further our governance processes. 

48

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Board of Directors

Committee 
Membership

A Audit Committee

N Nominations Committee

R

Remuneration 
Committee

Denotes Chair

A

N

R

Ian Lawson
Non-Executive Chairman

Albert Ellis
Chief Executive Officer

Daniel Quint
Chief Financial Officer

Appointed to the Board as 
Executive Chairman on 25 
April 2020 and acting as  
Non-Executive Chairman 
from 1 January 2021.

Ian brings over 20 years’ public 
company board-level experience 
across both the support services 
and engineering sectors. He retired 
from Severfield plc in January 2018 
after serving over four years as Chief 
Executive, and prior to this he was a 
main Board Director of Kier Group plc 
from 2005 to 2013, with responsibilities 
for the Services, Property and 
Residential Divisions. Ian is also the 
Non-Executive Chairman of Billington 
Holdings plc and NJDR Group Ltd and 
Non-Executive Director of Tolent plc. 
Ian is a fellow of the Royal Institute of 
Chartered Surveyors and a fellow of the 
Chartered Institute of Building. Ian is 
Chair of the Nominations Committee. 

Appointed to the position of 
Chief Executive Officer on  
1 October 2020, having  
acted as an Independent  
Non-Executive Director for the 
Company from 17 March 2020. 

Appointed to the Board on 18 
May 2020. Appointed as Chief 
Financial Officer on 1 February 
2021, having acted as Interim 
Chief Financial Officer since 
17 December 2019.

Albert brings considerable experience in 
the staffing and human capital sector 
having spent over 21 years at Harvey 
Nash, the technology recruitment 
and IT solutions group. Albert held 
the position of Group Chief Executive 
Officer for 14 years, and prior to that, 
Chief Financial Officer. Prior to that, 
Albert also held a number of senior 
finance roles within Hays Plc, the FTSE 
250 recruitment company. Albert is a 
qualified Chartered Accountant and is 
also currently a Trustee of Asia House.

Daniel is an experienced CFO and a 
Fellow of the Institute of Chartered 
Accountants in England and Wales. 
With over 10 years’ board level 
experience with private and public 
companies, Daniel also spent five 
years at Robert Walters plc, one of the 
world’s leading professional recruitment 
consultancies, where he held the role 
of Finance Director (UK, Middle East 
and Africa). Most recently, Daniel 
was Interim CFO at AIM-listed Young 
& Co.’s Brewery, P.L.C. Prior to this, 
Daniel spent three years as CFO of 
SPIE UK, the leading energy, safety and 
environmental solutions provider.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

49

A

N

R

A

N

R

A

N

R

Catherine Lynch
Independent Non-Executive Director

Ian Starkey
Independent Non-Executive Director

Richard Thomson
Senior Independent Director

Appointed to the Board on  
1 January 2021.

Appointed to the Board on  
1 January 2021.

Catherine is a highly experienced HR 
director, with over 20 years’ experience, 
and was formerly Chief People Officer 
UK & Ireland at Flutter Entertainment 
plc, the FTSE 100-listed global sports 
betting, gaming and entertainment 
company. Prior to this, Catherine 
spent over three years as Chief People 
Officer at Virgin Media, with additional 
experience including leading the HR 
functions of Ardonagh Group and 
BGL Group. Catherine is a Fellow of 
the Chartered Institute of Personnel & 
Development (“CIPD”) and is currently 
a member of the Advisory Board of 
Dial Global, a community focused on 
inclusion. Catherine is Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee.

Ian has significant financial expertise, 
specifically in financial management, 
control and reporting. Ian had a  
35-year career at KPMG, including 
23 years as a lead audit engagement 
partner in the UK and Switzerland and 
as a member of the UK Board. At KPMG, 
Ian worked with blue-chip corporate 
clients including BAE Systems, Diageo, 
Roche, Unilever and Vodafone. Ian is 
currently a Non-Executive member of 
the Board at DAC Beachcroft LLP and 
a member of the Audit Committee of 
Historic Royal Palaces. Ian is a qualified 
Chartered Accountant. Ian is Chair  
of the Audit Committee.

Appointed to the Board on  
17 September 2019.

Richard has over 20 years’ experience 
as an independent director and board-
level advisor. He began his career at 
Rothschild where he spent seven years, 
followed by five years at Alcentra, a 
global asset management firm. More 
recently he has split his time between 
various turnaround director/adviser 
roles, and a legal-tech start-up which 
he co-founded. Richard holds two 
Master’s degrees from St Catherine’s 
College Oxford, the Securities Institute 
diploma, the Financial Times Non-
executive Director diploma, and is a 
member of The Institute for Turnaround.

Tom Spain 
Non-Executive Director 

Appointed to the Board on  
28 July 2021.

Tom Spain founded the business Henry 
Spain Investment Services Limited in 
2010. In his early career Tom worked as a 
stockbroker at Edward Jones. Tom holds 
the Chartered Institute for Securities and 
Investment qualification in Private Client 
Investment Advice & Management, as well 
as Chartered Insurance Institute Financial 
Planner status. Tom is a Chartered Wealth 
Manager and member of the Chartered 
Institute of Securities and Investment,  
as well as a member of the Personal 
Finance Society.

50

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Corporate  
Governance Report

Staffline Group plc (the “Company”) is 
an AIM listed company and is committed 
to maintaining the highest standards 
of corporate governance throughout its 
operations and ensuring that all of its 
practices are conducted transparently, 
ethically and efficiently. The Company 
believes that scrutinising all aspects of its 
business and reflecting, analysing and 
improving its procedures will result in the 
continued success of the Company and 
improve shareholder value. 

In compliance with the AIM Rules for 
Companies, the Company has chosen to 
comply with the UK’s Quoted Companies 
Alliance Corporate Governance Guidelines 
for Small and Mid-Size Quoted Companies 
(the “QCA Code”). Staffline Group plc, being 
a UK registered and listed company, is subject 
to the City Code on Takeovers and Mergers. 

Details of the QCA Code and how the 
Company complies with it is detailed below: 

1. Establish a strategy 
and business model which 
promote long-term value for 
shareholders 

Our Vision 

To be a world class recruitment and training 
Group, the clear market leader and trusted 
partner known for excellent service and 
integrity, driven forward by digital innovation. 

The Group’s strategy is to drive the long-
term growth of the business. The Group’s 
business model is set out on page 6 and the 
strategic priorities for the Group are set out 
on page 7. 

The Group is split into three divisions: 
Recruitment GB; Recruitment Ireland;  
and PeoplePlus. 

The Recruitment GB division is a provider 
of flexible blue-collar workers across a wide 
range of industries. The Recruitment Ireland 
division is a generalist recruitment solutions 
provider, operating in a branch network 
covering all major cities across the island of 
Ireland. The PeoplePlus division is a training 
provider, delivering adult education, prison 
education and skills-based employability 
programmes across the UK. 

The principal risks faced by the Group in 
achieving this strategy are detailed on  
pages 34 to 45. 

2. Seek to understand and 
meet shareholder needs and 
expectations 
The Board is responsible for representing 
and promoting the interests of the Group’s 
shareholders and is accountable to them  
for the long-term success of the Group. 

All shareholders are encouraged to attend 
the Annual General Meeting, although 
restrictions due to Covid-19 meant that, due 
to UK Government guidelines, attendance 
was not permitted at the 2021 AGM. 
Shareholders will be able to attend the 
2022 AGM meeting in person and also 
arrangements will be made to enable 
shareholders to submit questions to the Board 
in advance of the meeting. Shareholders will 
be invited to vote by proxy, the results of 
which will be published on the website at 
www.stafflinegroupplc.co.uk/investor-
relations/agm/ following the meeting. 

In addition to the formal institutional 
meetings held at the interim and year end, 
the Executive Directors meet existing and 
prospective investors throughout the year 
as part of the ongoing investor relations 
engagement strategy. The Chairman also 
meets key shareholders during the year to 
discuss corporate governance issues and to 
listen to any concerns that are raised. The 
Company’s Senior Independent Director 
is also available to meet with shareholders 
and provides an independent point of 
contact on Board matters. During the year, 
the Chairman consulted with certain of the 
Company’s major shareholders who were 
opposed to certain resolutions proposed 
at the Company’s 2021 Annual General 
Meeting regarding the authority to issue 
Ordinary Shares of the Company. In her 
capacity as Remuneration Committee Chair, 
Catherine Lynch consulted with a number 
of the Company’s major shareholders on 
certain remuneration issues, including on 
the design of a new long-term incentive plan 
for Executive Directors and senior executives 
and the Grant of Options under the 2021 
Long-Term Incentive Plan on 30 June 2021. 

A dedicated email address exists to  
enable all current and prospective 
shareholders to contact the Group directly:  
investors@staffline.co.uk. The Board 
recognises that, whilst the majority of 
the shareholders are large institutions, 
the Company’s private shareholders are 
important and the Board welcomes  
dialogue with them. 

3. Take into account wider 
stakeholder and social 
responsibilities and their 
implications for long-term 
success 
The Board recognises its social, economic 
and environmental responsibilities to wider 
stakeholders and is committed to act in a 
way which it considers to be most likely to 
promote the success of the Group for the 
benefit of its members as a whole, having 
particular regard to: 
1.  The likely consequences of any decision 

in the long term; 

2.  The interests of the Group’s employees 

and flexible workers; 

3.  Fostering business relationships with 
customers, suppliers, regulators and 
investors; 

4.  Reducing the risk of modern slavery in 

our supply chains; 

5.  The impact of operations on the 

community and the environment; 
6.  Maintaining a reputation for high 

standards of business conduct; and 
7.  The need to act fairly between members 

of the Company. 

This underpins the Board’s ability to set 
the overall strategic direction of the Group 
and support its core values, policies and 
procedures, which in turn, creates an 
environment in which the business and 
its employees can act with integrity and 
effectiveness, whilst driving profitable 
growth. We aim to demonstrate this through 
our decisions and within our corporate 
policies. Information on how the Board 
considered its stakeholders when making 
principal decisions is provided in the section 
172 statement provided in the ESG report on 
pages 26 to 37. 

4. Embed effective risk 
management, considering 
both opportunities and 
threats, throughout the 
organisation 
The Board is responsible for maintaining 
a strong system of internal control to 
safeguard shareholders’ interests and 
the Group’s assets and for reviewing 
its effectiveness. The system of internal 
financial control in place within Staffline 
is designed to provide reasonable, but 
not absolute, assurance against material 
misstatement or loss. 

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

51

Following the appointment of the Group 
Head of Internal Audit in September 2020, a 
comprehensive review of risk management 
processes and risk registers at both 
Divisional and Group level was undertaken, 
and this has led to implementation of a 
robust, standardised approach to risk 
management across the divisions during 
2021. This complements and builds upon 
divisional risk management processes, which 
are predominantly operationally focused. 

From a financial control point of view, a clear 
structure of delegated authority levels for a 
range of transactions is in place along with 
a formalised Schedule of Matters Reserved 
for the Board. The framework provided by 
these documents provides clarity around the 
extent to which the Board, as the body that 
has ultimate responsibility for managing 
the Group’s business and safeguarding the 
interests of its stakeholders, has chosen to 
delegate its authority in specific areas. 

Regular updates on risk matters are provided 
to the Audit Committee and the Board 
through both management reports and the 
Head of Internal Audit. Further information 
about the risk management process and the 
criteria used to assess risk is provided in the 
Principal Risks and Uncertainties section on 
pages 38 to 45 of this report. 

There is also regular review of financial 
information, including year-to-date 
and forecast performance against both 
current year budget and prior year, at all 
management levels up to and including the 
Board. Both risks to financial performance 
and potential opportunities are monitored 
to reduce the risk of financial performance 
going off-track. 

The Head of Internal Audit has led a review 
of key compliance policies in the Group, 
assisted by external legal counsel, which 
was completed in early 2021. Group-level 
policies have been defined to establish a 
standard approach across the business in 
relation to matters such as fraud, bribery, 
competition, whistle-blowing and conflicts 
of interest. 

The Internal Audit function plays an 
important role in sharing of knowledge and 
good practice across the divisions and the 
Head of Internal Audit works closely with 
divisional Governance and Compliance 
teams. The appointment of the Governance 
Director at Group level was made permanent 
during 2021 and work to implement a 
more formalised governance infrastructure 
is ongoing. 

There is an independent compliance 
audit team which sits locally within the 
Recruitment GB division, which is responsible 
for checking workers’ legal employment 
status and compliance with industry body 
and regulator standards e.g. Recruitment 
& Employment Confederation (REC) 
and Gangmasters and Labour Abuse 
Authority (GLAA) and a similar function in 
Recruitment Ireland. The Payroll teams in 
both Recruitment divisions receive ongoing 
training to ensure compliance with relevant 
legislation and procedures. 

5. Maintain the Board as a 
well-functioning, balanced 
team led by the Chair 
The Board’s role is to provide entrepreneurial 
leadership of the Group within a framework 
of prudent and effective controls which 
enable risk to be assessed and managed. It 
has a formal schedule of matters reserved 
for its decision. The Board delegates certain 
functions to its three principal committees: 
the Audit Committee; the Remuneration 
Committee; and the Nominations Committee. 

Audit Committee 

Responsible for the integrity of the 
Company’s financial statements and 
performance, ensuring the necessary 
internal controls and risk management 
systems are in place and effective. The Audit 
Committee meets at least four times a year. 

Remuneration Committee 

Responsible for the review, recommendation 
and implementation of the Group’s 
remuneration strategy, its framework and 
costs. The Remuneration Committee meets 
at least twice a year and on an ad hoc basis. 

Nominations Committee 

Responsible for ensuring that the Company 
has the executive and non-executive Board 
leadership it requires. The Nominations 
Committee meets at least once a year and 
otherwise as required. 

Details of the members of the Board are set 
out on pages 48 and 49. 

There is an appropriate combination of 
Executive and Non-Executive Directors, 
with two Executive and four Independent 
Non-Executive Directors, including the 
Chairman. Ian Lawson, Independent Non-
Executive Chairman leads the Board and 
is responsible for promoting the strategic 
success of the Company and creating value 
for shareholders in the long term, whilst 
ensuring that sound, effective corporate 
governance practices are embedded in the 
Group and in its decision-making processes. 

Albert Ellis, Chief Executive Officer, is 
responsible for developing and delivering 
the Group’s strategy within the policies and 
values established by the Board. Daniel 
Quint, Chief Financial Officer, is responsible 
for managing the financial risks, reporting 
and planning of the Group. 

Richard Thomson, Ian Starkey and 
Catherine Lynch, the other three 
Independent Non-Executive Directors, 
bring independent and objective analysis 
to all matters before the Board and its 
Committees using their substantial and 
wide-ranging experience. They monitor the 
executives’ delivery of strategy within the 
risk and governance structure agreed by 
the Board. Richard Thomson is the Senior 
Independent Director and, in this role, he 
supports the Chairman and provides an 
independent point of contact to shareholders 
on Board matters. Non-Executive Directors 
are expected to commit two days per month 
to the Company. This includes attendance 
at Board and Committee meetings, strategy 
sessions, the Annual General Meeting and 
meetings with shareholders and employees. 

The Board meets at least six times each year. 
During 2021, the Board held 16 formal Board 
meetings. The additional number of meetings 
principally related to the Group’s placing, 
subscription and open offer, the Group’s 
refinancing requirements, and the Covid-19 
pandemic, with a focus on the health 
and safety of the Group’s employees and 
customers. In addition, the Board focused 
on strengthening the Company’s corporate 
governance processes, including its financial 
controls. Given the Covid-19 pandemic, a 
minority of meetings were remote. 

52

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Corporate Governance Report continued

In addition to the standard agenda items, 
the Board considered the following matters 
during the year: 
•  On 10 June 2021, the Group completed 
a placing, subscription and open offer, 
raising gross proceeds of £48.4m. 
Additionally, the Group’s debt facilities 
were refinanced. The combined 
refinancing has transformed Staffline’s 
balance sheet; 

•  The impact of the Covid-19 pandemic on 
the Group’s operations and mitigating 
actions to protect the business, with a 
particular focus on ensuring the health 
and safety of the Group’s employees and 
customers; and 

•  The extensive period of Board restructuring 

concluded with the appointment of 
Ian Starkey and Catherine Lynch as 
Independent Non-Executive Directors on 
1 January 2021, and the appointment of 
Daniel Quint as Chief Financial Officer 
on 1 February 2021. 

The Board meeting attendance for the 16 
Board meetings held in 2021 is as below:

Director

Ian Lawson (Chairman)
Albert Ellis
Daniel Quint
Richard Thomson
Ian Starkey1
Catherine Lynch1
Tom Spain2

Number of 
meetings 
attended

Maximum 
number of 
meetings 
possible

16
16
16
13
13
12
6

16
16
16
13
13
12
6

1   Ian Starkey and Catherine Lynch were appointed to 

the Board on 1 January 2021. 

2  Daniel Quint was appointed as Chief Financial Officer 

on 1 February 2021. 

3  Tom Spain was elected as a Non-Executive Director at 

the Annual General Meeting on 28 July 2021.

Directors are given timely and relevant 
management information before each 
Board meeting. Directors are able to 
obtain independent professional advice in 
the course of their duties, at the Group’s 
expense. All Directors submit themselves for 
re-election annually. 

6. Ensure that between 
them the Directors have 
the necessary up-to-date 
experience, skills and 
capabilities 
The Board currently comprises the Non-
Executive Chairman, three independent 
Non-Executive Directors, one further 
Non-Executive Director and two Executive 
Directors, with a range of different 
experience and backgrounds. 

During 2021 the Board made significant 
progress with its strategic priority of 
improving the Group’s corporate governance 
structure. This included an extensive period 
of Board restructuring which concluded 
with the appointment of Ian Starkey and 
Catherine Lynch as Independent Non-
Executive Directors on 1 January 2021. 

Ian, a qualified chartered accountant,  
has significant financial expertise, 
specifically in financial management,  
control and reporting. Ian had a 35-year 
career at KPMG, including 23 years as  
a lead audit engagement partner in the  
UK and Switzerland, and as a member  
of the UK Board. Ian chairs the Group’s  
Audit Committee. 

Catherine is a highly experienced HR 
director, with over 20 years’ experience, 
and was formerly Chief People Officer UK 
& Ireland at Flutter Entertainment plc, the 
FTSE 100-listed global sports betting, gaming 
and entertainment company. She is also a 
member of the Advisory Board of Dial Global, 
a community focused on inclusion. Catherine 
chairs the Group’s Remuneration Committee. 

Other Board appointments during the 
year were: 
•  Daniel Quint was appointed as Chief 
Financial Officer on 1 February 2021. 
Daniel has over 10 years’ experience at 
board level at both private and public 
companies. He is a Fellow of the Institute 
of Chartered Accountants in England  
and Wales; and

•  Tom Spain was elected as a Non-

Executive Director at the Annual General 
Meeting on 28 July 2021. Tom Spain 
founded the business Henry Spain 
Investment Services Limited in 2010. 

The Nominations Committee is responsible 
for the appointment of Directors but 
ensures that the whole Board is involved in 
the process. 

Following the above appointments, the 
Board believes that the Company has a 
strong, independent, highly qualified and 
diverse Board with the right people in place 
to lead the business. Biographical details of 
the Directors are set out on pages 48 and 49. 

Directors are encouraged to keep their skills 
up to date by attending appropriate courses. 
A number of Directors are either currently, 
or have previously been, members of other 
Boards where new skills can be learned. 

7. Evaluate Board 
performance based 
on clear and relevant 
objectives, seeking 
continuous improvement 
The year 2021 began with the appointment 
of Catherine Lynch and Ian Starkey as 
Independent Non-Executive Directors on 
1 January 2021 and at the Annual General 
Meeting on 28 July 2021 Tom Spain was 
elected as a Non-Executive Director. 

During the latter part of 2021, with the 
newly constituted Board fully established, 
the Board conducted a Board evaluation 
internally, with the use of a questionnaire, 
which focused on the remit and key issues 
facing the Board. In particular, the Board 
considered how it discharges its strategic 
remit and reviews key issues facing the 
Group. As required, Directors discussed 
any matters with the Chairman or Senior 
Independent Director, as appropriate. The 
Chairman discussed the outcome of the 
evaluation, including any recommendations 
and actions, with the Board. 

Hereafter, the Board evaluation will be 
conducted on an annual basis which will 
include an external evaluation at least every 
three years. 

8. Promote a corporate 
culture that is based 
on ethical values and 
behaviours 
Our corporate values are: 
•  Teamwork: working together across  
the business to achieve more for  
our customers; 

•  Respect: taking time to understand,  

trust and support each other to achieve 
shared success; 

•  Commitment: demonstrating a  

relentless and driven ambition to  
exceed expectations; 

•  Reliability: fulfilling all our customer 
requirements, getting the job done; 

•  Creativity: solving problems and 

• 

suggesting new ideas and insights; and 
Integrity: doing things the right way, for 
the right reason, ethically, honestly,  
every time. 

These values are driven by the Board and 
are at the heart of all our processes  
and decisions. 

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

53

We take compliance with legislation and 
industry standards extremely seriously. A 
review of certain of the Group’s compliance 
policies including bribery, fraud and whistle-
blowing led by the Group’s Head of Internal 
Audit is being undertaken together with the 
Group’s external legal counsel. In addition, 
the Group Governance Director presented to 
the Board in February 2022. Further details 
are provided on page 35. 

We are committed to reducing the threat 
of modern slavery and human trafficking 
and work with like-minded organisations to 
try to achieve this. This is described in the 
ESG report on pages 30 to 32, along with 
our commitment to health and safety and 
our approach to General Data Protection 
Regulations. 

9. Maintain governance 
structures and processes 
that are fit for purpose and 
support good decision-
making by the Board 
During the year, and in accordance with 
best governance practice, the Board 
approved a Schedule of Matters Reserved 
for the Board. These matters include: 
•  Setting the Group’s strategy, including 

the values and standards; 
•  Approving any changes to the 

Company’s structure and capital; 
•  Approval of (i) Annual Report and 

Accounts (ii) half-yearly reports (iii) 
dividend policy and (iv) approval of any 
significant changes in accounting policies 
or practices; 

•  Ensuring maintenance of a sound system 
of internal controls and risk management; 

•  Approval and oversight of major  

capital projects; 

•  Approval of contracts of the Group or 
contracts proposed by any subsidiary 
not in the ordinary course of business; 

•  Major investments; 
•  Communications with shareholders; 
•  Board and Committee membership; 
•  Remuneration of Directors, Company 
Secretary and other senior executives; 
•  Prescribing a matrix of authority limits 
for delegation to the various tiers of 
management and oversight bodies; and 

•  Approval of key policies including  

Code of Conduct, Inside Information 
Policy, Securities Dealing Code,  
Bribery Prevention Policy and Whistle-
blowing Policy. 

The Board also formed a new Disclosure 
Committee and adopted a new Inside 
Information Policy and Securities Dealing 
Code during 2021.

The Chair is responsible for leading the 
Board, facilitating the effective contribution 
of all members and ensuring that it operates 
effectively in the interests of the shareholders. 

3  Catherine Lynch was appointed as a director and as 
a member of the Committee on 1 January 2021. 

4  Tom Spain was appointed as a director on 28 July 

2021. With effect from 6 December 2021, Tom Spain 
attends the Committee as observer. 

As noted under Principle 5, the Board 
delegates certain functions to its three 
committees: the Audit Committee; the 
Remuneration Committee; and the 
Nominations Committee. 

Audit Committee 

The Audit Committee has responsibility for:
1.  Oversight of the effectiveness, integrity 

and quality of the Company and Group’s 
financial reporting; 

2. Monitoring developments in relevant 
financial reporting legislation and 
regulation and their adoption by  
the Group; 

3. Appointment of the external auditor and 
oversight of their independence and 
performance; 

4. The external audit process, including 
meeting the external auditor and 
reviewing any reports from them 
regarding financial reporting and internal 
control systems; 

5. Oversight of the design, implementation 
and effectiveness of internal financial 
controls, including identifying and 
commissioning specific internal  
control reviews; 

6. Overseeing the independence and 

effectiveness of the internal audit function; 

7. Oversight of the Group’s risk register (see 
pages 38 to 45), risk appetite and risk 
mitigation arrangements; and 

8. Reviewing the effectiveness of the Group’s 

whistle-blowing arrangements. 

In accordance with its terms of reference, 
the Audit Committee meets at least four 
times a year at appropriate intervals in the 
financial reporting and audit cycle and 
otherwise as required. The Committee met 
five times during 2021. Meeting attendance 
is provided below, along with a summary of 
the key items of business considered:

Director

Ian Starkey1
Ian Lawson2 
Richard Thomson 
Catherine Lynch3
Tom Spain4

Number of 
meetings 
attended

Maximum 
number of 
meetings 
possible

5
5
5
5
1

5
5
5
5
1

1 

Ian Starkey was appointed as a director and as Chair 
of the Committee on 1 January 2021. 

2  Ian Lawson, who served as Executive Chairman and 
as a member of the Committee from 7 April 2020 to 
31 December 2020, moved into a non-executive role 
from 1 January 2021, while remaining a member of 
the Committee. 

Key items considered by the 
Committee 

•  Annual external audit plans and  

auditor’s fees; 

•  Year-end external audit findings, 

including reports on internal controls; 
•  Results announcement and the Annual 
Report, including form of the external 
audit opinion; 
Interim results announcement; 

• 
•  Trading updates;
•  Letters of Representation provided to the 

external auditor; 

•  Appropriateness of applying the going 
concern basis of preparation in the 
Financial Statements; 

•  Key accounting judgements  

• 

and estimates; 
Internal audit activities, including 
receiving reports on internal audit 
findings and reviewing and approving  
the internal audit strategy and work  
plan for 2022; 

•  The Group’s risk management 

arrangements, including review of 
divisional and Group risk registers and 
risk reporting processes; and
•  The Group’s internal controls 

environment, including key compliance-
related policies, the delegation of 
authority matrix and the Schedule of 
Matters Reserved for the Board. 

Strengthening of governance 
arrangements and internal controls 
The following actions were taken 
by the Committee during 2021 as 
part of the Group’s commitment to 
further strengthening its governance 
arrangements: 
1.  Internal Controls: The Committee 
discussed an internal audit report on 
temporary worker payroll and related 
matters in the Recruitment GB business 
and approved a template internal letter 
of representation on internal controls that 
divisional management are required to 
formally sign off as part of half-year and 
year-end procedures. Divisional Finance 
Directors were also required to present to 
the Committee on their respective internal 
control environments, including matters 
highlighted by the external auditor, controls 
improvement initiatives and resourcing of 
the divisional Finance functions. 

54

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Corporate Governance Report continued

2. Compliance Policies: Completion of the 
Committee’s review of key compliance-
related policies launched in late 2020 led 
to a number of Group-wide policies being 
defined and rolled out to either replace 
existing divisional policies or address gaps 
in policy coverage. Policies approved by 
the Committee and/or Board as part of 
this initiative were Anti-Bribery Policy, 
Anti-Fraud Policy, Anti-Money Laundering 
Policy, Anti-Facilitation of Tax Evasion 
Policy, Competition Policy, Conflicts of 
Interest Policy and Whistle-blowing Policy. 
All of these have been rolled out during 
2021 and form part of mandatory training 
packages for relevant employees. 
3. Whistle-blowing arrangements:  

The Committee approved adoption of 
a single outsourced whistle-blowing 
hotline provider across the Group and the 
inclusion of the Group Head of Internal 
Audit as a recipient of all reports received 
via this channel, of which there were none 
during 2021. 

4. Other Policies: The Committee 

approved Group policies covering gifts 
and hospitality, drugs and alcohol in 
the workplace, non-audit services and 
accounting treatment of bid-related costs. 

5. Risk Management: The Committee 

promoted clearer alignment between risk 
and business planning to ensure that both 
risks and the potential costs of mitigation 
were properly considered during the 
budgeting and strategic planning process. 

The key audit matters considered by 
the Committee: 
The Committee is responsible for overseeing 
the Group’s financial reporting, including 
significant accounting policies and estimates 
and judgements. 

Key matters considered by the Committee 
in relation to reporting for the year ended 
31 December 2021 include: 
•  Going concern: The Committee and 

Board receive regular updates in respect 
of the Group’s actual and forecast 
performance and confirm the Group’s 
ongoing compliance with its obligations 
under the financing agreement entered 
into in June 2021. As part of the Group’s 
annual budgeting process, the Board 
received detailed presentations from 
divisional management and Group 
executives, after which it approved 
the annual budget for the year ended 
31 December 2022 and the forecast 
for the following two years. The 
Committee reviewed a detailed year-
end memorandum prepared by the 
Group Finance team that set out the 

Group’s financing arrangements and 
covenant obligations, FRC guidance 
in relation to assessment of going 
concern matters, both budget/actual 
and forecast profitability and cash flows 
and headroom against current funding 
arrangements. In the opinion of the 
Committee, use of the going concern 
basis when preparing the Group’s 
accounts for the year ended 31 December 
2021 is appropriate.

•  Recruitment GB and Recruitment 
Ireland revenue: The Committee’s 
attention was drawn to the risk of unusual 
journals affecting reported revenues in 
the recruitment businesses during its 
review of the external auditor’s planning 
document relating to the 2021 audit. The 
Committee subsequently considered the 
external auditor’s findings in relation to 
this matter at its meeting in March 2022 
and noted that no material unusual 
transactions had been identified. 
•  PeoplePlus accrued income: The 
Committee’s attention was drawn to 
the risk of inappropriate recognition of 
unbilled revenue during its review of the 
external auditor’s planning document 
relating to the 2021 audit. The Committee 
subsequently considered the external 
auditor’s findings in relation to this matter 
at its meeting in March 2022 and noted 
that no material items had been identified.

•  PeoplePlus income recognition on 

significant contracts: The Committee 
was made aware of an historical issue 
with incomplete records relating to 
certain services provided by PeoplePlus, 
when the matter was first identified. The 
Committee and Board received regular 
updates from management whilst 
investigations were ongoing and the 
Committee considered papers prepared 
by management and by the Group’s 
internal auditor as part of the year end 
process. The Committee was satisfied 
that appropriate conclusions had been 
drawn and noted the external auditor’s 
findings, reported to the Committee 
meeting in March 2022, which were 
that no material errors or omissions 
had been identified. 

•  PeoplePlus clawback adjustments: 
The Committee’s attention was drawn 
to the risk of incomplete or inaccurate 
clawback provisions on PeoplePlus 
contracts and framework agreements 
during its review of the external auditor’s 
planning document relating to the 2021 
audit. The Committee considered papers 
prepared by both management and 
the Group’s internal auditor and the 
external auditor’s findings, reported to 

the Committee meeting in March 2022, 
which noted that no material errors or 
omissions had been identified.
•  Revenue recognition, including 
treatment of revenue arising on 
Restart contracts in PeoplePlus: 
Revenue recognition policy in respect 
of ongoing contracts in all divisions has 
not changed during 2021. With regard 
to revenue on the three Restart sub-
contracts, which went live in June 2021, 
the Committee reviewed detailed papers 
prepared by divisional management that 
set out the principles contained in IFRS 15 
and how these are to be applied. The 
Committee agreed with management’s 
identification of the relevant contracts, the 
performance obligations, the transaction 
price, its allocation and the intention 
that revenue should be recognised over 
the period of the contract using time 
elapsed as the measure of completion 
of performance obligations. In the 
opinion of the Committee, the proposed 
accounting treatment complies with the 
requirements of IFRS 15 and there is no 
basis for identifying the Restart contracts 
as onerous or potentially onerous. 
•  Valuation of goodwill and intangible 
assets: The Committee reviewed a 
paper prepared by the Group Finance 
team summarising an impairment review 
carried out on the goodwill, intangibles 
and property, plant and equipment 
allocated to the Group’s cash-generating 
units at 31 December 2021. Detailed 
assumptions used in the review were 
considered by the Committee and 
considered reasonable and appropriate. 
The Committee concurred with 
management’s view that no impairment 
was indicated. 

•  Quality of earnings and classification 
of specific items as underlying or 
non-underlying: The Committee 
reviewed a summary of items that might 
be considered non-underlying but were 
not material either individually or in 
aggregate. The Committee agreed with 
management’s proposal that these items 
should not be separately disclosed in the 
Group’s 2021 Report and Accounts. 
•  Alternative performance measures:  
The Group’s Annual Report for the year 
contains a small number of alternative 
performance measures, which are not 
a substitute, or superior to, any IFRS 
measures of performance but have 
been included as they include key 
measures used within the business 
for assessing performance and are 
considered an important means of 
comparing performance year-on-year. 

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

55

The Committee is satisfied that, where 
alternative performance measures are 
used, their use is appropriate  
and aids understanding of the  
Group’s performance.

•  Discussion on Executive remuneration  

and Non-Executive fees; 

•  Non-Executive Directors’ fees, including 
additional fees for Committee Chairs; 
•  Approval to offer remuneration packages 

Remuneration Committee 

The Remuneration Committee ensures 
that remuneration arrangements support 
the strategic aims of the business and 
enable the recruitment, motivation 
and retention of senior executives in a 
manner that is aligned to shareholder 
interests, while also complying with the 
requirements of regulation. In addition 
to reviewing and agreeing Directors’ 
remuneration, the Committee also approves 
proposed remuneration packages for new 
appointments and remuneration changes for 
all employees where their basic gross salary 
is £120,000 or above. 

to proposed senior appointments; 

•  Current share option schemes; 
•  A new Long-Term Incentive Plan for 
Executive Directors and senior  
executives; and 

•  Standardisation of contracts for the 

Group’s senior executive management. 

Nominations Committee 

The Nominations Committee reviews the 
structure and composition of the Board 
and its Committees, particularly the skills, 
knowledge and experience of Directors. 
Succession planning and approval of Board 
appointments form an important part of the 
Committee’s responsibilities. 

The members of the Committee are all  
Non-Executive Directors. Except as 
shareholders and Directors, none of the 
members has any personal financial interest 
in the Group. 

The Nominations Committee meets at least 
once a year and otherwise as required. The 
meeting attendance for the three meetings 
held in 2021 is below, along with the key 
agenda items:

Director

Ian Lawson (Chair) 
Richard Thomson 
Catherine Lynch1
Ian Starkey2 

Number of 
meetings 
attended

Maximum 
number of 
meetings 
possible

3
3
3
3

3
3
3
3

The Remuneration Committee meets at least 
twice a year and otherwise as required. The 
meeting attendance for the six meetings 
held in 2021 is below, along with the key 
agenda items:

Number of 
meetings 
attended

Maximum 
number of 
meetings 
possible

Director

Catherine Lynch (Chair)1
Richard Thomson 
Ian Lawson 
Ian Starkey2 

6
6
6
6

6
6
6
6

1  Catherine Lynch was appointed as Non-Executive 

Director and member of the Committee on 
1 January 2021. 

2  Ian Starkey was appointed as Non-Executive Director 
and member of the Committee on 1 January 2021.

Key items considered by the Committee 
•  Ratification of the election of Tom Spain 
as Non-Executive Director at the Annual 
General Meeting on 28 July 2021. 
•  The Group Succession Planning and 

Talent Management Strategy. 

•  The Board gender-diversity ‘journey’, the 
topic of which is to be revisited annually. 

•  The composition of the previous Board 
versus the extensive period of Board 
restructuring, which has concluded with 
the recent appointments of three Non-
Executive Directors to the Board. 

1  Catherine Lynch was appointed as Non-Executive 

Chair of the Committee on 1 January 2021. 

2  Ian Starkey was appointed as Non-Executive Director 
and member of the Committee on 1 January 2021.

Key items considered by the Committee 
during 2021 
•  Consideration of remuneration 
arrangements to be offered to: 
 – Albert Ellis in respect of his 

remuneration as Chief Executive 
Officer; 

 – Daniel Quint in respect of his 

appointment and remuneration as 
Chief Financial Officer; and 

 – Other senior management 

appointments within the Group. 
•  Bonus objectives for 2022 annual bonuses 
for the Chief Executive Officer, Chief 
Financial Officer, Divisional Managing 
Directors and Divisional Finance Directors; 

10. Communicate how the 
Company is governed and is 
performing by maintaining a 
dialogue with shareholders 
and other relevant 
stakeholders 
The Board is responsible for representing 
and promoting the interests of the Group’s 
shareholders and is accountable to them for 
the long-term success of the Group. 

The Executive Directors endeavour to 
hold regular meetings with institutional 
shareholders. They also update on the 
performance of the Group to shareholders 
and wider stakeholders at the interim and 
annual results presentations. 

At the Company’s Annual General Meeting 
on 28 July 2021, the Company noted there 
was a sizeable vote against Resolutions 
12 (General authority to allot shares) and 
13 (Disapplication of pre-emption rights) 
representing 37.68% of votes cast on each 
resolution. Feedback received from certain 
shareholders indicated that some were 
concerned by the potential dilution caused 
by an allotment of shares, particularly on a 
non-pre-emptive basis. The Board noted that 
it followed the Pre-emption Group Principles 
that the routine authority to disapply pre-
emption rights should not exceed more than 
5% of the ordinary share capital in any  
one year. 

Resolution 13 was a Special Resolution, 
requiring at least 75% of shareholders voting 
to vote in favour of the resolution. 

The Board has maintained a dialogue with 
these shareholders to ensure that it fully 
understands the concerns that they have 
raised. The Board welcomes dialogue with 
all shareholders. 

All other Resolutions proposed at the 2021 
AGM were passed on a poll, with more  
than 88% of shareholders voting, voting  
in favour of the resolutions. Votes were  
cast in respect of approximately 80% of  
the issued share capital.

The Executive Directors also hold regular 
meetings and maintain an ongoing dialogue 
with the Group’s lenders. 

Details of the governance structure and work 
of the Board committees are included in the 
Annual Report.

56

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Report on 
Remuneration

The Remuneration Committee comprises 
four Directors, of which all are Independent 
Non-Executive Directors: Catherine Lynch 
(Chair), Ian Lawson, Richard Thomson, 
and Ian Starkey. The Board notes that, 
as Ian Lawson became Independent 
Non-Executive Chairman on 1 January 
2021, his membership of the Committee 
now complies with the QCA Corporate 
Governance Code, which states that all 
members of a Remuneration Committee 
must be independent. The Remuneration 
Committee operates within The QCA 
Corporate Governance Code and The 
QCA Remuneration Committee Guide in 
observing elements of ESG compliance, 
especially regarding gender pay parity as 
detailed on page 32. 

Policy on Executive 
Directors’ remuneration 
The Executive Directors’ remuneration 
packages are designed to attract, motivate, 
and retain Directors of the high calibre 
needed to help the Group successfully 
compete in its marketplace. The Group’s 
policies are to pay Executive Directors a 
salary at market levels for comparable jobs 
in the sector whilst recognising the relative 
size and complexity of the Group.

The remuneration of the Directors, which was 
all paid by the Group, is detailed on page 59 
of these financial statements. 

Advisers to the Committee 
In the latter part of 2020, the Committee 
appointed Mercer to act as the Committee’s 
advisers to provide services to the 
Committee, including in connection with 
the design and implementation of a new 
long-term incentive plan (the Long Term 
Incentive Plan). The Committee consulted 
with a number of the Company’s major 
shareholders on this proposed long-term 
incentive arrangement. 

The Board of the Company comprised two 
Executive Directors during the year. Details 
of their basic salary are provided below: 
•  Albert Ellis was appointed as an 

Independent Non-Executive Director of 
the Company on 26 April 2020 and as 
Chief Executive Officer on 1 October 
2020, on a base salary of £350,000 
p.a. Details of the fee he received for the 
period 26 April 2020 to 30 September 
2020 in his position as an Independent 
Non-Executive Director are provided on 
page 117; and 

•  Daniel Quint, Interim Chief Financial 

Officer, was appointed as an Executive 
Director of the Company on 18 May 
2020. During the period from 18 May 
2020 to 31 January 2021, he continued 
to receive payment in his capacity as 
Interim Chief Financial Officer. Following 
his appointment as Chief Financial 
Officer on 1 February 2021, Daniel 
received a basic salary of £275,000 p.a. 

Salary review 

The Committee reviewed the salaries of 
Albert Ellis and Daniel Quint in December 
2021. Their salaries were increased by 2.5% 
with effect from 1 January 2022, following 
benchmarking with comparable companies 
and in line with that of the wider population 
of permanent employees. 

Entitlement to reduce salary 

The Committee recognises that there may 
be circumstances where the continual 
normal operation of the Company’s 
business is reasonably perceived to be at 
risk due to exceptional and/or unexpected 
serious national or international events 
which directly or indirectly impact on the 
Company (including, but not limited to a 
catastrophe, pandemic, war, terrorism, or 
financial crisis). In these circumstances, 
the Company has reserved the right acting 
reasonably to reduce the salary of Albert 
Ellis, Chief Executive Officer, or Daniel Quint, 
Chief Financial Officer, by a maximum of 
20%, without any corresponding reduction 
in their normal working hours. 

The Committee made awards under the 
Long Term Incentive Plan to the Executive 
Directors and certain members of the senior 
management team on 30 June 2021. Vesting 
of awards will be conditional upon the 
satisfaction of performance conditions over 
a three-year vesting period and continuous 
employment within the Staffline Group. The 
Company announced details of the awards 
made to the Executive Directors, including 
details of the performance conditions via the 
Regulatory News Service immediately upon 
granting of the awards. 

Responsibilities 
The Committee acts in accordance with 
its formal Terms of Reference, which are 
available on the Company’s website. The 
Committee makes recommendations to 
the Board on the remuneration and other 
benefits, including bonuses and long-term 
incentive plans, of the Executive Directors 
and members of senior management, 
acting within its Terms of Reference and 
Policy on Executive Directors’ remuneration. 
In addition, the Committee considers the 
remuneration for the Chairman. 

The Board sets the annual base fees payable 
to the Independent Non-Executive Directors 
and they do not receive any additional 
benefits, nor are they eligible to participate 
in any pension, bonus, or share-based 
incentive arrangements. 

No Director plays a part in any decision 
about his or her own remuneration. Executive 
Directors may accept appointments outside 
the Group subject to prior Board approval. 

Basic salary 
The Committee reviews the basic salary of 
Executive Directors annually. In addition, 
salary may be reviewed if an individual 
changes position or responsibility. In 
deciding appropriate levels, the Committee 
takes into account objective research on, 
and benchmarking with, comparable 
companies, general market conditions and 
business and personal performance. 

Upon the appointment of Albert Ellis as a 
Chief Executive Officer, Ian Lawson was 
appointed as Independent Non-Executive 
Chairman on 1 January 2021, upon which 
his salary as Executive Chairman decreased 
from £195,000 p.a. on the basis of a three 
days a week time commitment to a fee of 
£100,000 p.a. on the basis of a one day per 
week time commitment. 

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

57

This reduction has not been applied to the 
salary of either Albert Ellis or Daniel Quint 
during the Covid-19 pandemic given that 
they only commenced employment under 
their service agreements, which contained 
this provision, on 1 October 2020 and 
1 February 2021 respectively. 

Annual bonus 
Annual bonuses are awarded at the 
discretion of the Remuneration Committee 
as an incentive and to reward Group as 
well as divisional performance during 
the financial year pursuant to specific 
performance criteria. In exercising its 
discretion, the Committee takes into account 
the underlying operating profit before 
taxation performance against budget, 
amongst other things. The Committee 
believes that incentive compensation should 
recognise the growth and profitability of 
the business, which should be aligned to 
the interests of shareholders. 

2020 Annual bonus 

Albert Ellis did not participate in a 2020 
annual bonus plan due to his appointment 
on 1 October 2020 and in light of the 
ongoing Covid-19 pandemic. 

Daniel Quint was appointed as a director 
on 18 May 2020, having been appointed 
as Interim Chief Financial Officer on 
17 December 2019. Daniel received a fee 
through a limited company during his 
appointment as Interim Chief Financial 
Officer. Daniel was not entitled to receive 
any benefits or bonus from the Company 
until his appointment as Chief Financial 
Officer on 1 February 2021. 

2021 Annual bonus 

Albert Ellis and Daniel Quint will be entitled 
to a bonus equivalent to a maximum of 100% 
of their base salary pro-rata from their date 
of appointment, subject to the achievement 
of pre-determined performance conditions. 
The annual bonus is not contractual and is 
at the sole discretion of the Committee. 

Details of the 2021 Annual bonus payable 
to Albert Ellis and Daniel Quint on 31 March 
2022 are provided below on page 59. 

Directors’ share options 

2021 Long Term Incentive Plan 

Under the terms of the Company’s 2021 Long Term Incentive Plan (the “2021 LTIP”), on 
30 June 2021 the Board approved the award of and granted nil cost options (the “Options”) 
over 1,678,279 ordinary shares of ten pence each in the Company (“Ordinary Shares”) to 
certain employees, including Albert Ellis and Daniel Quint, as set out below. 

The vesting of the Options is subject to the satisfaction of the Company achieving certain 
financial performance criteria for the financial year ending 31 December 2023. 50% of the 
Options awarded are subject to achieving earnings per share hurdles and 50% are subject 
to achieving EBITDA hurdles. In addition, no Options will vest unless the average closing 
price of the Ordinary Shares for the last 30 business days of 2023 is above a minimum 
target. The Options will vest from 30 June 2024 (the “Vesting Period”) and will be exercisable 
until 30 June 2031. 

The Board believes it is key that the Group incentivises Executive Directors and senior 
managers to drive the business forward, whilst aligning their interests with those of 
shareholders. The Options awarded to Albert Ellis and Daniel Quint are set out in the 
table below:

Director

Position

LTIP Options granted

Albert Ellis
Daniel Quint

Chief Executive Officer
Chief Financial Officer

573,770
450,820

Following the grant of the Options, the total number of Ordinary Shares outstanding under 
the 2021 LTIP was 1,678,279, (now reduced by 180,328 shares to 1,497,951, following the 
exit of a senior executive from the Company in September 2021), representing 1% of the 
Company’s issued share capital. 

Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share scheme 

On 29 October 2021, the Company announced the grant of options to employees as part 
of its Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share scheme for 2021. The scheme is open to all permanent 
employees in the UK, giving them the opportunity to participate in the future growth of the 
Group via share option arrangements. 

Eligible employees were invited to subscribe for options over the Company’s ordinary 
shares of 10p each in the Company (“Ordinary Shares”) with an exercise price of 50.56p, 
a 20% discount to the closing middle market price of 63.20p on the trading day before the 
invitation to participate was made on 8 October 2021. The options have a contract start 
date of 1 December 2021 and are exercisable between 1 December 2024 and 31 May 2025. 

A total of 272 employees elected to participate, representing an increase in the workforce 
on the previous grants in 2018 and 2019, demonstrating an improved level of employee 
engagement, retention, and workforce advocacy, and, pursuant to these elections, a total 
of 2,430,723 options over Ordinary Shares were granted on 29 October 2021, representing 
1.5% of the current issued share capital of 165,767,728 shares. As of 31 December 2021, there 
were 256 participants with a total of 2,269,097 options over Ordinary Shares. 

Options totalling 71,202 shares were granted to the following Executive Directors in respect 
of savings up to the £500 monthly savings limit applicable to all SAYE contracts:

Director

Position

Shares granted under option in SAYE 
scheme 2021

Albert Ellis
Daniel Quint

Chief Executive Officer
Chief Financial Officer

35,601
35,601

58

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Report on Remuneration continued

Joint Share Ownership Plan 2018 
In October 2017, the Remuneration Committee approved a Joint Share Ownership Plan 
(“JSOP”) to provide additional incentives to certain senior executives, covering the five-year 
period ending 31 December 2022. 

The JSOP shares were held jointly between the Directors and the Staffline Group plc 
Employee Benefit Trust (the “EBT”). Under the terms of the JSOP rules, the Directors were 
eligible to receive the excess of any disposal proceeds received for the JSOP shares over the 
participation price. The JSOP shares did not carry dividend or voting rights whilst they were 
jointly held by the Directors and the Staffline Group plc Employee Benefit Trust. From the 
date of award, the right to sell the JSOP shares was not at the discretion of the executives 
but instead at the discretion of the EBT. 

During the year, the Company wound up the JSOP because it was no longer functioning 
as an incentive or retention tool. The most straightforward way to terminate the JSOP was 
for the JSOP shares to be transferred to the EBT. Remaining participants in the Plan were, 
therefore, requested to transfer their shares to the trustee of the EBT (the “Transfer”) in 
exchange for consideration equal to contributions paid at the date of the award. 

The former Executive Directors’ interests are detailed below:

Director

C Pullen1

Award date

Participation 
price

Interest over 
number of shares

Lapsed during 
the year

Date on which 
exercisable

24 Jan 2018

999p

275,000

275,000 30 June 2023

1   C Pullen resigned on 26 April 2020 and his entitlement to the shares subject to the JSOP lapsed.

Pension arrangements 
The Group has a defined contribution pension scheme with Scottish Widows for all 
permanent employees. 

During 2021, Executive Directors were entitled to receive a contribution from the Group 
equivalent to 10% of their basic salary into this or another scheme of their choice. 

Commencing from the date of their appointments as Executive Directors on 1 October 
2020 and 1 February 2021 respectively, at their request, Albert Ellis and Daniel Quint each 
received a monthly cash allowance of 10% of basic salary in lieu of a company pension 
contribution. Daniel Quint was not entitled to receive any pension contribution, or cash 
allowance, from the Company during his appointment as Interim Chief Financial Officer. 

Following a decision of the Remuneration Committee taken in December 2021, based on 
benchmarking with comparable companies and market data, the monthly cash allowance 
in lieu of the company pension contribution payable to Executive Directors was increased to 
15% of basic salary. 

The Group also operates a defined benefit pension scheme, which is closed to new entrants. 
No current Directors are members of this scheme. 

Other benefits and benefits 
in kind 
Albert Ellis and Daniel Quint are entitled to 
receive the following benefits: 
1.  Life assurance cover of four times salary; 
2. Private medical insurance for themselves, 

their spouse, and their children; 

3. Car allowance of £12,000 and £11,000 

p.a. respectively; and 

4. Permanent health insurance. 

With effect from 1 January 2022 the car 
allowance benefit received by Albert Ellis 
and Daniel Quint was increased to £18k and 
£15k respectively, after benchmarking with 
comparable companies and market data. 

None of the Non-Executive Directors or the 
Chairman received any benefits or benefits 
in kind. 

Policy on Non-Executive 
Directors’ remuneration 
The remuneration of the Independent 
Non-Executive Directors is determined by 
the Board and is based upon independent 
surveys of fees paid to Non-Executive 
Directors of similar companies. 

The Independent Non-Executive Directors 
do not receive any benefits apart from their 
basic fees. 

From 1 January 2020 to 31 May 2020, 
the Independent Non-Executive Directors 
received a fee of £30,000 p.a. 

The remuneration of the Independent  
Non-Executive Directors, effective from 
1 June 2020, was as follows: 
•  The basic fee of the Independent  

Non-Executive Directors was £40,000; 
•  An additional fee of £5,000 p.a. payable 
to (i) the Chair of the Audit Committee 
and (ii) the Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee; and 

•  Subject to prior agreement by the 

Remuneration Committee a day-rate 
can be charged at a rate of £1,500 per 
day (plus VAT, if applicable), by any 
Independent Non-Executive Director, 
in the event that there is work required 
in addition to their normal duties. The 
normal duties of an Independent Non-
Executive Director are anticipated to take 
two days per month. 

Following review in December 2021, it was 
agreed by the Remuneration Committee 
that there would be no increase in the fee 
payable to the Independent Non-Executive 
directors for the year of 2022. 

Tom Spain was elected as a Non-Executive 
Director at the Annual General Meeting 
on 28 July 2021. Tom Spain is the Board 
representative of Henry Spain Investment 
Services Limited (“Henry Spain”), the 
largest shareholder in the Company. Tom 
Spain (on behalf of himself and Henry 
Spain) agreed that no fee shall be payable 
in respect of his (or any replacement 
representative director) appointment. 

Service contracts 
The Executive Directors have entered into 
service agreements with the Company. 
Albert Ellis has a service agreement which 
is terminable on six months’ notice given by 
Albert Ellis, and 12 months’ notice given by 
the Company, Daniel Quint has a service 
agreement which is terminable on  
12 months’ notice given by either party. 

Letters of appointment 
Ian Lawson, Richard Thomson, Ian Starkey 
and Catherine Lynch each have contracts 
terminable on six months’ notice given 
by either party. There are no contractual 
termination payments other than as a result 
of the contractual notice period. 

Tom Spain has a contract for a fixed term 
of one year, unless otherwise terminated 
earlier upon three months’ notice given 
by either party, which will terminate 
automatically and without the need for 
notice and, unless Tom Spain and the 
Board agrees to extension or renewal, is 
terminable on one months’ notice. There is 
no contractual termination payment. 

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

59

Directors’ remuneration summary (audited) 
The table below sets out the remuneration received by the Directors in respect of the year 
ended 31 December 2021 and for the year ended 31 December 2020:

Salary, 
fees
£000

Annual 
bonus14 
£000

Car 
allowance 
£000

Pension9  
£000

Year

Compensation 
for loss of 
office  
£000

Others10
£000

Total
£000

Executive Directors
A Ellis1

D Quint2

C Pullen3

Chair
I Lawson4

T Lewis5

2021
2020
2021
2020
2021
2020

2021
2020
2021
2020

A Ellis1

R Thomson7

Non-Executive Directors
2021
E Barker6
2020
2021
2020
2021
2020
2021
2020
2021
2020
2021
2020
2021

I Starkey12

C Lynch11

D Ward8

T Spain13

350
88
292
413
–
125

96
133
–
25

–
3
–
27
43
61
–
10
45
–
45
–
–

350
–
252
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

12
3
11
–
–
5

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

35
9
25
–
–
14

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

2021

2020

871

885

602

–

23

8

60

23

–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

–

2
–
2
–
–
–

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

4

–

749
100
582
413
–
144

96
133
–
25

–
3
–
27
43
61
–
10
45
–
45
–
–

1,560

916

1  Albert Ellis was appointed as Chief Executive Officer on 1 October 2020, having been an Independent  

Non-Executive Director of the Company for the period 17 March 2020 to 30 September 2020. 

2  Daniel Quint was appointed to the Board on 18 May 2020. During the period from his date of appointment as a 
director until 31 December 2020, he received a fee through a limited company. He did not receive any pension, 
or any benefits and he was not entitled to a bonus in respect of the year ended 31 December 2020. Daniel was 
appointed as Chief Financial Officer on 1 February 2021. 

3  Chris Pullen resigned as Chief Executive Officer on 19 February 2020 and as a director on 26 April 2020. 

He received a termination payment of £135,000. He did not receive any salary increase during 2020. No bonus 
was due or payable during 2020. 

4  Ian Lawson was appointed as Executive Chairman on 25 April 2020. Ian Lawson became Independent  

Non-Executive Chairman on 1 January 2021. 

5  Tracy Lewis assumed the role of Chair on 17 September 2019 and resigned on 24 April 2020. 

6  Ed Barker resigned on 31 January 2020. 

7  Fees to Richard Thomson included a payment of £25,000 for advisory services to the Company during the three 

months up to the Board changes, announced on 27 April 2020. 

8  Dawn Ward resigned as an Independent Non-Executive Director on 23 April 2020. 

9  Pensions include both Company contributions and cash allowances where the Directors have elected not to have 

contributions paid into a pension fund. 

10 Others represent medical insurance benefits. 

11  Catherine Lynch was appointed as an Independent Non-Executive Director and Remuneration Committee Chair 

on 1 January 2021. 

12  Ian Starkey was appointed as an Independent Non-Executive Director and Audit Committee Chair on 1 January 2021. 

13 Tom Spain was elected as a Non-Executive Director at the Annual General Meeting on 28 July 2021. Tom Spain 
agreed that no fee shall be payable in respect of his (or any replacement representative director) appointment.

14  The bonus will be settled in the proportion to following the elements, 66.67% through payroll and 33.33% in the 

Company’s Ordinary shares.

 
 
60

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Report of  
the Directors

The Directors present their Annual Report for the Group and the Company together with the audited financial statements for the year 
ended 31 December 2021. 

Reporting requirements 
The following information is provided in other appropriate sections and is included in this Directors’ Report by reference and so is deemed to 
be part of it:

Information

Strategic Report
Corporate Governance
• Corporate Governance Report
• Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

Report on Remuneration

Reported

Pages 1 to 45

Pages 46 to 55
Page 64

Pages 56 to 59

Future Development and events occurring after the balance sheet date

Details can be found in the Strategic Report on pages 8 to 11

Stakeholder Engagement and Key Decisions

Details can be found in the Strategic Report on pages 34 and 35

Greenhouse gas emissions – Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting

Details can be found in the ESG section on page 37

Financial instruments 

Details can be found in the notes to the financial statements  
on pages 117 to 120

Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (“TCFD”)

Reference can be found in the ESG report on pages 26 to 37

Principal activities 
A review of the activities of the Group, including financial and non-financial information, can be found in the Strategic Report, along with 
details of the Group’s future developments. 

Dividends 
The Board is not proposing a final dividend payment for 2021.

Directors 
The names and biographies of the Directors who held office at the date of this Annual Report are set out on pages 48 and 49. Changes to 
Directors from 1 January 2021 and up until the date of this Report are provided in the table below:

Position

Date of appointment

Date of resignation

Director

Ian Lawson

Daniel Quint 

Executive Chairman 
Independent Non-Executive Chairman

Interim Chief Financial Officer 
Chief Financial Officer

Catherine Lynch

Independent Non-Executive Director

Ian Starkey

Tom Spain

Independent Non-Executive Director

Non-Executive Director

25 April 2020 
1 January 2021

18 May 2020 
1 February 2021

1 January 2021

1 January 2021

28 July 2021

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

61

Qualifying third party 
indemnity provisions 
A qualifying third-party indemnity provision 
as defined in Section 232(2) of the Companies 
Act 2006 is in force at the date of approval 
of the financial statements for the benefit of 
each of the Directors in respect of liabilities 
incurred as a result of their office, to the 
extent permitted by law. In respect of those 
liabilities for which Directors may not be 
indemnified, the Company maintained a 
directors’ and officers’ liability insurance 
policy throughout the financial year. 

Branches 
The Group has operations in the United 
Kingdom, Republic of Ireland and Portugal. 

Employee involvement 
The Directors recognise the value of involving 
employees in the business and ensure that 
matters of concern to them, including the 
Group’s strategic objectives, vision, values 
and principles, are communicated in an open 
and regular manner. Employees are kept 
aware of progress versus these objectives 
and key developments within the Group by 
regular briefings. Senior staff participate in 
various bonus scheme arrangements linked 
to financial performance.

Disabled persons 
It is the Group’s policy to give full and 
fair consideration to suitable applications 
for employment from disabled persons. 
Once employed, disabled persons 
receive equal opportunities for training, 
career development and promotion. 
Opportunities exist for employees of the 
Group who become disabled to continue 
their employment or to be trained for other 
positions within the Group. 

Payments to suppliers 
The Group aims to comply with the payment 
terms agreed with suppliers when goods or 
services have been provided in accordance 
with the agreed conditions. 

On 9 June 2021 the shareholders, at a 
General Meeting, approved the creation and 
issue of 96,837,242 new Ordinary Shares 
pursuant to the Placing, Subscription and 
Open Offer. 

The Company currently has general 
authority to allot shares and authority to 
purchase its own shares. Resolutions for the 
Company to renew its general authority to 
allot shares and to purchase its own shares 
will be proposed at the Annual General 
Meeting 2022.

Share options 
The Company operates certain share option 
schemes for the benefit of its employees. 
Details are provided in note 7. 

Going concern 
The financial statements have been 
prepared on a going concern basis. The 
Directors have reviewed this basis and have 
made full disclosure in note 3, concluding 
that there is a reasonable expectation that 
the Group and Company have adequate 
resources to continue in operational 
existence for the foreseeable future. 

Annual General Meeting 
The 2022 Annual General Meeting will be 
held at 9am on Thursday 26 May 2022 at 
the Head Office of the Company, 19-20 
The Triangle, Nottingham, NG2 1AE subject 
to any UK Government Covid-19 guidelines 
in place at the time. The business to be 
considered at the meeting is set out in a 
separate Notice of Meeting dispatched to 
the members. 

Political donations 
The Group has made no political donations 
in the current or prior years. 

Charitable donations 
The Group made charitable donations of 
£18,488 in the year (2020: £16,000). 

Research and development 
The Group continues to invest in and develop 
its digital platforms as discussed in the 
Strategic Report. 

Share capital 
At 31 December 2020 the Company’s 
issued share capital consisted of 68,930,486 
Ordinary Shares with a nominal value of 10p 
each (“Ordinary Shares”), each share having 
equal voting rights. 

On 21 May 2021, the Company announced 
a proposed Placing, Subscription and 
Open Offer for new Ordinary Shares, which 
comprised the following elements: 
•  A total of 87,249,500 new Ordinary 

Shares of 10 pence each placed at a 
price of 50 pence per share (the “Issue 
Price”) to certain existing shareholders 
and new institutional investors; 

•  A total of 750,500 new Ordinary Shares 
of 10 pence each to certain Directors 
and employees of the Group at the issue 
price; 

•  An open offer to existing shareholders 
for 10 shares for every 78 Ordinary 
Shares held, for a total of 8,837,242 new 
Ordinary Shares of 10 pence each at the 
issue price; and 

•  The proposed Placing, Subscription 

and Open Offer was approved by the 
shareholders in a General Meeting 
on 9 June 2021. The total number of 
shares in issue following the Placing, 
Subscription and Open Offer is 
165,767,728. 

62

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Report of the Directors continued

Substantial shareholdings 
The interests, by parent Company, of our top ten shareholders in the issued ordinary share capital of the Company, which have been 
notified as at 31 December 2021, were as follows, representing 82.7% of the total issued ordinary share capital:

Henry Spain Investment Services 
HRnet Group 
Schroder Investment Management 
Gresham House Asset Management
Fidelity International
Aberdeen Standard Investments
Lombard Odier Investment Managers
Hargreaves Lansdown, stockbrokers
Interactive Investor
Teviot Partners

Ordinary shares of  
10p each 
(‘000) 

Percentage of Ordinary 
Shares 

26,480
23,987
18,181
17,014
15,832
11,373
11,305
7,487
6,537
5,155

143,351

15.97
14.5 
11.0 
10.3
9.6
6.9
6.8
4.5
3.9
3.1

86.6

The Company’s issued share capital consists of 165,767,728 ordinary shares with a nominal value of 10 pence each (“Ordinary Shares”), 
each share having equal voting rights, of which 1,140,400 are held by the Employee Benefit Trust. Therefore, the total voting rights in the 
Company are 164,627,328. 

In accordance with AIM Rule 26, in so far as the Company is aware, the percentage of the Company’s issued share capital that is not in 
public hands is 52.2%. 

The latest allocation can be viewed on the Group’s website at: www.stafflinegroupplc.co.uk/investor-relations/shareholder-information. 

Directors’ shareholdings 
The beneficial holdings of the Directors as at 31 December 2021 in the Company’s issued share capital at 31 December 2021 was as follows:

Director

Ian Lawson
Albert Ellis
Daniel Quint
Catherine Lynch
Ian Starkey
Richard Thomson
Tom Spain1

Ordinary shares of 
10p each in issue

231,577
320,000
225,320
10,000
50,000
42,579
1,200,000

% of total

0.14%
0.19%
0.13%
0.006%
0.03%
0.025%
0.72%

1  Tom Spain is the Board representative of Henry Spain Investment Services Limited, the largest shareholder in the Company. Henry Spain Investment Services Limited is 

considered to be a ‘person closely associated’ with Tom Spain by virtue of him discharging managerial responsibilities over it (he is a director and the sole shareholder). Henry 
Spain Investment Services Limited acts as discretionary investment manager (including holding discretionary voting rights) to a number of underlying private clients, resulting 
in a notifiable interest in 25,352,121 Ordinary Shares at the date of his appointment.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

63

Post balance sheet events 
There were no events between the balance 
sheet date of 31 December 2021 and the 
approval of these accounts on 21 March 
2022 that are required to be brought to  
the attention of shareholders.

Auditors 
A resolution to appoint Grant Thornton 
UK LLP as auditor will be proposed at the 
forthcoming Annual General Meeting. 

The Directors’ Report was approved by the 
Board and signed on its behalf by: 

Louise Barber FCG 
Company Secretary 
21 March 2022

Long-Term Incentive Plan
The Board believes it is key that the Group 
incentivises Executive Directors and senior 
managers to drive the business forward, 
whilst aligning their interests with those 
of shareholders. Under the terms of the 
Company’s 2021 Long Term Incentive 
Plan (the “2021 LTIP”), the total number of 
options awarded to Executive Directors and 
senior executives was 1,678,279. The options 
awarded to the Executive Directors are set 
out in the table below:

Director

2021 LTIP Options granted

Albert Ellis
Daniel Quint

573,770
450,820

The vesting of options is subject to the 
satisfaction of the Company achieving 
certain financial performance criteria for the 
financial year ending 31 December 2023. 
50% of the Options awarded are subject to 
achieving earnings per share hurdles and 
50% are subject to achieving EBITDA hurdles. 
In addition, no Options will vest unless the 
average closing price of the Ordinary Shares 
for the last 30 business days of 2023 is above 
a minimum target. The Options will vest from 
30 June 2024 (the “Vesting Period”) and will 
be exercisable until 30 June 2031. 

Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) 
share scheme 
The SAYE scheme is open to all permanent 
employees in the UK, giving them the 
opportunity to participate in the future 
growth of the Group via share option 
arrangements. Eligible employees were 
invited to subscribe for options over the 
Company’s ordinary shares of 10.00p each 
(“Ordinary Shares”) with an exercise price 
of 50.56p, a 20% discount to the closing 
middle market price of 63.20p on the trading 
day before the invitation to participate was 
made on 8 October 2021. The options have a 
contract start date of 1 December 2021 and 
are exercisable between 1 December 2024 
and 31 May 2025. Options totalling 71,202 
were granted to the Executive Directors  
as follows:

Director

2021 SAYE options granted

Albert Ellis
Daniel Quint

35,601
35,601

64

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Statement of Directors’ 
Responsibilities

The Directors confirm that: 
•  so far as each Director is aware, there is 
no relevant audit information of which 
the Group and Company’s auditor is 
unaware; and 
the Directors have taken all the steps that 
they ought to have taken as Directors 
in order to make themselves aware of 
any relevant audit information and to 
establish that the Group and Company’s 
auditor is aware of that information. 

• 

The Directors are responsible for preparing 
the Annual Report in accordance with 
applicable law and regulations. 

To the best of our knowledge: 
• 

• 

• 

the Group financial statements, prepared 
in accordance with UK-adopted 
international accounting standards, give a 
true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, 
financial position and profit or loss of the 
Group and the undertakings included in 
the consolidation taken as a whole; 
the Company financial statements, 
prepared in accordance with United 
Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting 
Practice, give a true and fair view of the 
assets, liabilities, financial position and 
profit or loss of the Company; and 
the Strategic Report and Directors’ 
Report include a fair review of the 
development and performance of the 
business and the position of the Group 
and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole, together 
with a description of the principal risks 
and uncertainties that they face. 

By Order of the Board 

Louise Barber FCG 
Company Secretary 
21 March 2022

The Directors are responsible for preparing 
the Annual Report and the financial 
statements in accordance with applicable 
law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to 
prepare financial statements for each 
financial year. Under that law the Directors 
have prepared the Group financial 
statements in accordance with UK-adopted 
international accounting standards 
and Company financial statements in 
accordance with United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice (United 
Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising 
FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework” 
and applicable law). Under company law 
the Directors must not approve the financial 
statements unless they are satisfied that 
they give a true and fair view of the state 
of affairs of the Group and Company and 
profit or loss of the Group and Company 
for that period. In preparing these financial 
statements, the Directors are required to: 
•  select suitable accounting policies and 

then apply them consistently; 
•  make judgements and accounting 
estimates that are reasonable  
and prudent; 

•  state whether applicable UK-adopted 
international accounting standards 
have been followed for the Group 
financial statements and United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice 
(United Kingdom Accounting Standards, 
comprising FRS 101) have been followed 
for the Company financial statements, 
subject to any material departures 
disclosed and explained in the financial 
statements; and

•  prepare the financial statements on 
the going concern basis unless it is 
inappropriate to presume that the 
Company will continue in business. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that 
are sufficient to show and explain the 
Company’s transactions and disclose 
with reasonable accuracy at any time the 
financial position of the Company and 
enable them to ensure that the financial 
statements comply with the Companies 
Act 2006. They are also responsible for 
safeguarding the assets of the Company 
and hence for taking reasonable steps for 
the prevention and detection of fraud and 
other irregularities. 

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

65

Independent  
Auditor’s Report 

to the members of Staffline Group plc 

Opinion 

Our opinion on the financial statements is unmodified 

We have audited the financial statements of Staffline Group plc (the ‘parent 
company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘group’) for the year ended 31 December 
2021, which comprise the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, the 
consolidated statement of changes in equity, the company statement of changes 
in equity, the consolidated and company statements of financial position, the 
consolidated statement of cash flows and notes to the financial statements, 
including a summary of significant accounting policies. The financial reporting 
framework that has been applied in the preparation of the group financial 
statements is applicable law and UK-adopted international accounting standards. 
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of 
the parent company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards, including Financial Reporting Standard 101 ‘Reduced 
Disclosure Framework’ (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice). 

In our opinion: 
• 

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s and 
of the parent company’s affairs as at 31 December 2021 and of the group’s profit 
for the year then ended; 
the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with 
UK adopted international accounting standards; 
the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in 
accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and 
the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the 
requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 

• 

• 

• 

Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance 
with International Standards on Auditing 
(UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our 
responsibilities under those standards 
are further described in the ‘Auditor’s 
responsibilities for the audit of the financial 
statements’ section of our report. We are 
independent of the group and the parent 
company in accordance with the ethical 
requirements that are relevant to our audit of 
the financial statements in the UK, including 
the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to 
listed entities, and we have fulfilled our other 
ethical responsibilities in accordance with 
these requirements. We believe that the 
audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient 
and appropriate to provide a basis for 
our opinion. 

Conclusions relating to 
going concern 
We are responsible for concluding on the 
appropriateness of the directors’ use of the 
going concern basis of accounting and, 
based on the audit evidence obtained, 
whether a material uncertainty exists 
related to events or conditions that may 
cast significant doubt on the group’s and 
the parent company’s ability to continue 
as a going concern. If we conclude that a 
material uncertainty exists, we are required 
to draw attention in our report to the related 
disclosures in the financial statements or, if 
such disclosures are inadequate, to modify 
the auditor’s opinion. Our conclusions are 
based on the audit evidence obtained up 
to the date of our report. However, future 
events or conditions may cause the group or 
the parent company to cease to continue as 
a going concern. 

Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment 
of the group’s and the parent company’s 
ability to continue to adopt the going 
concern basis of accounting included 
obtaining an understanding of how 

management prepared their base case 
forecasts for the period to 31 December 
2023; assessing the accuracy of 
management’s forecasting by comparing 
the reliability of past forecasts to actual 
results; obtaining an understanding of 
key trading, balance sheet and cash flow 
assumptions and testing key assumptions 
to underlying historical financial analysis 
and available information; assessing the 
accuracy of the debt covenant calculations 
within the forecasts by agreeing the 
forecasts to the new debt agreements; 
assessing the appropriateness and 
robustness of management’s forecasts by 
applying our own sensitivities and reverse 
stress testing; assessing the feasibility of the 
mitigating actions available to management 
to continue as a going concern if downside 
sensitivities were to crystalise; performing 
arithmetical and consistency checks on 
management’s going concern model using 
internal modelling specialists; and assessing 
the adequacy of related disclosures within 
the annual report. 

In our evaluation of the directors’ 
conclusions, we considered the inherent risks 
associated with the group’s and the parent 
company’s business model including effects 
arising from macro-economic uncertainties 
such as Brexit and Covid-19, we assessed 
and challenged the reasonableness of 
estimates made by the directors and the 
related disclosures and analysed how 
those risks might affect the group’s and the 
parent company’s financial resources or 
ability to continue operations over the going 
concern period. 

Based on the work we have performed, 
we have not identified any material 
uncertainties relating to events or conditions 
that, individually or collectively, may cast 
significant doubt on the group’s and the 
parent company’s ability to continue as a 
going concern for a period of at least twelve 
months from when the financial statements 
are authorised for issue. 

In auditing the financial statements, we 
have concluded that the directors’ use of 
the going concern basis of accounting in 
the preparation of the financial statements 
is appropriate. 

The responsibilities of the directors with 
respect to going concern are described 
in the ‘Responsibilities of directors for the 
financial statements’ section of this report. 

66

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Independent Auditors Report continued
to the members of Staffline Group plc

Our approach to the audit 

Overview of our audit approach 
Overall materiality: 

Group: £1.63m, which represents 5% of the group’s preliminary three year average 
loss before taxation. 

Parent company: £1.22m, which represents 2% of the parent company’s total assets, 
capped at 75% of group materiality. 

Group key audit matters were identified as: 
•  Unusual recruitment revenue journals – occurrence (same as previous year); 
•  PeoplePlus unbilled revenue (accrued income) – occurrence (existence), accuracy 

and valuation (same as previous year except for valuation which has been added); 
•  PeoplePlus clawback prior period adjustment – completeness and accuracy (new); 

and 

Materiality

Key Audit
Matters

•  PeoplePlus income earned on certain significant contracts – occurrence and 

accuracy (new). 

Scoping

No key audit matters were identified for the parent company. 

Our auditor’s report for the year ended 31 December 2020 included three Group 
key audit matters and one parent company key audit matter that have not been 
reported as key audit matters in our current year auditor’s report. These relate to: 
•  Going concern basis of accounting (Group); 
•  Goodwill and other intangible assets – valuation (Group); 
•  Non-underlying administrative expenses – occurrence, accuracy and presentation 

and disclosure (Group); 
Investments in the parent company – valuation (Parent). 

• 

We do not consider these to be key audit matters this year, as the risk surrounding 
these items has reduced significantly due to the improved performance of the Group, 
and reduction of items classified as non-underlying in the current year. We therefore 
consider these key audit matters are no longer relevant.

Our audit scope remained consistent with the previous year, and our work performed 
over components covered 92% of the Group’s revenue and 81% of the Group’s loss 
before tax. 

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

67

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, 
were of most significance in our audit of the financial statements of the 
current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material 
misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These matters 
included those that had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; 
the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the 
engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our audit 
of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, 
and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

Description

Audit
Response

KAM

Disclosure

Key
Observations

HIGH

t
c
a
p
m

i

t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s

l

i

a
c
n
a
n
fi

l

a
i
t
n
e
t
o
P

10

19

18

17

13

2

11

4

1

12

14

3

5

6

8

9

7

15

20

21

16

Key audit matter

Significant risk

Other risk

LOW

Extent of management judgement

HIGH

1.  Going concern basis of accounting
2.  Goodwill and other intangible assets – valuation
3.  Unusual Recruitment revenue journals – 

4. 
5. 

6. 

occurrence and accuracy
Investments – valuation
PeoplePlus unbilled revenue (accrued income)  
– occurrence, accuracy and valuation
PeoplePlus income earned on certain significant 
contracts – occurrence and accuracy

7. 

8. 

Non underlying administrative expenses -
occurrence, accuracy and presentation 
and disclosure
PeoplePlus clawback adjustments – 
completeness and accuracy
9.  Management over-ride of controls
10.  Recruitment revenue
11.  PeoplePlus revenue
12.  Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme

13.  Taxation and social security
14.  Borrowings
15.  Defined benefit pension scheme
16.  Holiday pay accrual
17.  Cash
18.  Deferred income
19.  Payroll
20.  LTIP and SAYE
21.  Deferred tax

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
68

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Independent Auditors Report continued
to the members of Staffline Group plc

Key Audit Matter – Group

How our scope addressed the matter – Group

Unusual recruitment revenue journals 
– occurrence 
We identified occurrence of unusual recruitment 
revenue journals as one of the most significant 
assessed risks of material misstatement due 
to fraud.

Under ISA 240 (UK) there is a presumed risk that 
revenue may be misstated due to the improper 
recognition of revenue. The revenue recorded by 
the Group is one of the key factors that impacts 
EBITDA and is a Key Performance Indicator for 
the Group. 

The majority of revenues within the recruitment 
segment of the Group are considered to be non-
complex. Unusual journals outside of the normal 
business process therefore pose a risk of fraud 
due to their abnormality. 

In responding to the key audit matter, we performed the following audit procedures: 
•  Assessed and documented the design and implementation of controls around the 

recording of revenue; 

•  Performed a detailed extended walkthrough to ensure processes and controls were 

operating consistently across the population of revenue transactions; 
•  Assessed whether the accounting policies adopted by the directors are in 
accordance with the requirements of IFRS 15, and whether management 
accounted for revenue in accordance with the accounting policies, including 
journal entries outside of the normal business process;

•  Used audit data analytics techniques to identify potentially unusual transactions 
within revenue. For a recruitment business we expect the majority of revenue 
transactions to follow a simple process through revenue, receivables and VAT, 
followed by settlement in cash, with a limited number of other related accounts. 
We have analysed the account combination of every transaction which impacts 
revenue or receivables during the period and selected for testing any transaction 
which fell outside of our expectation. We then obtained sufficient and appropriate 
evidence to support those transactions; and 

•  This testing has been supported by the testing of operating effectiveness of bank 
reconciliation controls, and a substantive test of detail on a sample of revenue 
transactions.

Relevant disclosures in the Annual 
Report and Accounts 
•  Corporate governance code: Audit 
Committee, The key audit matters 
considered by the Audit Committee

•  Financial statements: Note 3,  

Accounting policies

Our results
Our audit did not identify any material adjustments in relation to the occurrence of 
unusual recruitment revenue journals.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

69

Key Audit Matter – Group

How our scope addressed the matter – Group

PeoplePlus unbilled revenue (accrued 
income) – occurrence, accuracy and 
valuation
We identified occurrence (existence), 
accuracy and valuation of unbilled revenue 
(accrued income) in PeoplePlus as one of the 
most significant assessed risks of material 
misstatement due to fraud.

Under ISA 240 (UK) there is a presumed risk that 
revenue may be misstated due to the improper 
recognition of revenue. In 2019, management 
identified a material manual manipulation of 
internal reports relating to accrued income, 
which they derecognised in the 2019 financial 
statements. We note that there was no such issue 
in 2021 but there remains a risk.

The unbilled portion of revenue within PeoplePlus 
continues to be identified as a key audit matter 
due to the material impact on profit, and due 
to the increased judgement associated with the 
accrued revenue in comparison to those amounts 
that have been billed in the year.

Relevant disclosures in the Annual 
Report and Accounts
•  Corporate governance code: Audit 
Committee, The key audit matters 
considered by the Audit Committee

•  Financial statements: Note 3,  

Accounting policies

In responding to the key audit matter, we performed the following audit procedures: 
•  Assessed and documented the design and implementation of controls around the 

recording of revenue; 

•  Assessed whether the accounting policies adopted by the directors are in 
accordance with the requirements of IFRS 15, and whether management 
accounted for revenue in accordance with the accounting policies; 

•  Obtained an understanding of performance obligations within key contracts and 

application of revenue recognition for those contracts; 

•  Obtained management’s reconciliation of accrued income to the trial balance at 

year-end testing significant reconciling items; and 

•  Tested a sample of accrued income at year-end to underlying documentation, 

including where relevant subsequent invoice and receipt.

Our results
Our audit did not identify any material adjustments in relation to the occurrence and 
accuracy of PeoplePlus accrued income.

70

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Independent Auditors Report continued
to the members of Staffline Group plc

Key Audit Matter – Group

How our scope addressed the matter – Group

PeoplePlus clawback-completeness  
and accuracy
We identified completeness and accuracy of 
the clawback prior period adjustment within 
PeoplePlus as one of the most significant 
assessed risks of material misstatement due 
to error.

During 2021, a customer undertook a review 
of amounts claimed by PeoplePlus over the 
duration of the customer contract, which began 
in 2019. The review revealed that a number of 
records, which are required to substantiate 
revenue claims at all times during the contract 
period, were incomplete. Judgement exists in 
determining the appropriate level of the prior 
period adjustment to be recorded.

Relevant disclosures in the Annual 
Report and Accounts
•  Corporate governance code: Audit 
Committee, The key audit matters 
considered by the Committee
•  Financial statements: Note 3,  

Accounting policies

In responding to the key audit matter, we performed the following audit procedures: 
•  Assessed and documented the design and implementation of controls around the 

recording of revenue; 

•  Assessed whether the accounting policies adopted by the directors are in 

accordance with the requirements of IFRS 15 and whether management accounted 
for the clawback in accordance with the accounting policies; 

•  Obtained management’s judgement paper to support their assessment of the prior 

period adjustment and challenged key assumptions within; 

•  Challenged the calculations behind the clawback prior period adjustment 
recorded, testing and corroborating the underlying assumptions; and

•  Challenged the appropriateness of the adjustment determined by management, 

including assessing completeness of the adjustment by considering also whether a 
similar issue may exist on other contracts.

Our results
Our audit did not identify any material adjustments in relation to the accuracy and 
completeness of the clawback prior period adjustment within PeoplePlus Group.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

71

Key Audit Matter – Group

How our scope addressed the matter – Group

PeoplePlus income earned on certain 
significant contracts – occurrence 
and accuracy
We identified occurrence and accuracy of 
income earned on certain significant contracts 
within PeoplePlus as one of the most significant 
assessed risks of material misstatement due 
to error. 

Under ISA 240 (UK) there is a presumed risk 
that revenue may be misstated due to the 
improper recognition of revenue. During 2021, 
a customer undertook a review of amounts 
claimed by PeoplePlus over the duration of the 
customer contract, which began in 2019 The 
review revealed that a number of records, which 
are required to substantiate revenue claims 
at all times during the contract period, were 
incomplete. There is therefore an increased risk 
that further revenue was incorrectly recognised 
within this stream in the year.

Relevant disclosures in the Annual 
Report and Accounts
•  Corporate governance code: Audit 
Committee, The key audit matters 
considered by the Audit Committee 

•  Financial statements: Note 3,  

Accounting policies 

In responding to the key audit matter, we performed the following audit procedures: 
•  Assessed and documented the design and implementation of controls around the 

recording of revenue; 

•  Assessed whether the accounting policies adopted by the directors are in 
accordance with the requirements of IFRS 15, and whether management 
accounted for revenue in accordance with the accounting policies; 

•  Considered the terms of each contract to assess which contracts met our high risk 

contract criteria; and 

•  Tested an increased sample of training revenue earned in the period to supporting 
documentation including evidence of training being provided to ensure all revenue 
earned could be substantiated. 

Our results
Our audit work did not identify any material adjustments in relation to the occurrence 
and accuracy of income earned on significant contracts within PeoplePlus Group. 

72

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Independent Auditors Report continued
to the members of Staffline Group plc

Our application of materiality 
We apply the concept of materiality both in planning and performing the audit, and in evaluating the effect of identified misstatements on 
the audit and of uncorrected misstatements, if any, on the financial statements and in forming the opinion in the auditor’s report. 

Materiality was determined as follows:

Materiality measure

Group

Parent company

Materiality for 
financial statements 
as a whole

We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that, individually or in the 
aggregate, could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of the users of these financial 
statements. We use materiality in determining the nature, timing and extent of our audit work.

Materiality threshold

£1.63m which is 5% of the Group’s preliminary three 
year average loss before taxation and 0.17% of  
group revenue.

£1.22m, which is 2% of the parent company’s total 
assets, capped at 75% of group materiality.

Significant 
judgements made by 
auditor in determining 
the materiality

In determining materiality, we made the following 
significant judgements: 
•  The selection of an appropriate benchmark 
•  The selection on an appropriate percentage to 

apply that benchmark 

•  The consideration of other qualitative factors. 

We have also used loss before tax and revenue as 
underlying benchmarks against which to anchor 
our determined materiality. We have selected these 
benchmarks as they are key performance indicators for 
the Group and are of interest to stakeholders. 

Given the Group has made a marginal loss before tax 
and is close to a breakeven position in the year, we 
have used a three year average profit before tax, and 
applied a mid-range PBT percentage threshold to  
this benchmark.

Materiality for the current year is lower than the level 
that we determined for the year ended 31 December 
2020 due to the financial performance of the company 
improving and loss reducing. 

The materiality determined was not revised during  
the audit.

In determining materiality, we made the following 
significant judgements: 
•  The consideration of other qualitative factors 

Total assets is considered to be the most appropriate 
benchmark as the company’s purpose is that of holding 
of investments in subsidiary entities. The company does 
not undertake any trading activities. 

We have capped materiality at 75% of group materiality. 

Materiality for the current year is higher than the level 
that we determined for the year ended 31 December 
2020, due to the 75% benchmark being higher. This 
reflects the improved performance and stability of the 
Group and company in the year. 

The materiality determined was not revised during  
the audit.

Performance 
materiality used to 
drive the extent of  
our testing

Performance 
materiality threshold

Significant 
judgements 
made by auditor 
in determining 
performance 
materiality 

We set performance materiality at an amount less than materiality for the financial statements as a whole 
to reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and undetected 
misstatements exceeds materiality for the financial statements as a whole. 

£1.22m which is 75% of financial statement materiality. 

£0.92m, which is 75% of financial statement materiality. 

In determining performance materiality, we made the 
following significant judgements: 
•  Our experience with auditing the financial 

statements of the group in previous years – based 
on the number of identified misstatements in the 
prior year audit and management’s attitude to 
correcting misstatements identified. 

•  The number of components within the group 

In determining performance materiality, we made the 
following significant judgements: 
•  Our experience with auditing the financial statements 
of the group in previous years – based on the number 
of identified misstatements in the prior year audit and 
management’s attitude to correcting misstatements 
identified. 

and the extent of audit procedures planned and 
performed at these components. 

The performance materiality determined was not revised 
during the audit. 

The performance materiality determined was not 
revised during the audit.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

73

Materiality measure

Group

Parent company

Specific materiality We determine specific materiality for one or more particular classes of transactions, account balances or 
disclosures for which misstatements of lesser amounts than materiality for the financial statements as a  
whole could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the 
financial statements.

Specific materiality 
threshold

We determined a lower level of specific materiality for 
the following areas: 
•  Related party transactions 
•  Directors remuneration and transactions  

We determined a lower level of specific materiality for 
the following areas: 
•  Non-routine related party transactions 
•  Directors remuneration and transactions  

with Directors 

with Directors

Communication of 
misstatements to 
the audit committee

We determine a threshold for reporting unadjusted differences to the audit committee. 

Threshold for 
communication

£81,000 and misstatements below that threshold that, 
in our view, warrant reporting on qualitative grounds.

£61,000 and misstatements below that threshold that, in 
our view, warrant reporting on qualitative grounds.

The graph below illustrates how performance materiality interacts with our overall materiality and the tolerance for potential  
uncorrected misstatements. 

Overall materiality – Group

Overall materiality – Parent company

Group's preliminary 
3 year average 
loss before tax
£32.5m

FSM
£1.63m
5%

PM
£1.22m
75%

TFPUM
£0.41m
25%

Total assets
£102.9m

FSM
£1.22m

PM
£0.9m
75%

TFPUM
£0.32m
25%

FSM: Financial statements materiality

PM: Performance materiality

TFPUM: Tolerance for potential uncorrected misstatement

74

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Independent Auditors Report continued
to the members of Staffline Group plc

An overview of the scope of our audit 
We performed a risk-based audit that requires an understanding of 
the group’s and the parent company’s business and in particular 
matters related to: 

Understanding the group, its components, and their 
environments, including group-wide controls 

• 

the engagement team obtained an understanding of the group 
and its environment, including group-wide controls, and assessed 
the risks of material misstatement at the group level. 

•  Management identifies three segments: Recruitment GB, being 
the provision of workforce recruitment and management to 
industry, Recruitment Ireland being the provision of generalist 
recruitment services, and PeoplePlus, being the provision of skills 
services. These segments are monitored by the Chief Operating 
Decision Maker, and the Group’s Board. Strategic decisions are 
made on the basis of the operating results of these segments. 

Identifying significant components 

• 

In determining our audit scope and identifying significant 
components, we determined any individual component which 
contributed more than 15% to consolidated revenues or 
consolidated loss before taxation to be financially significant 
to the group. 

Type of work to be performed on financial information of 
parent and other components (including how it addressed 
the key audit matters) 

The audit of the financial information of each of the following 
components was completed using component materiality: 
•  Staffline Group plc 
•  Staffline Recruitment Limited 
•  Staffline Recruitment (NI) Limited 
•  PeoplePlus Group Limited 

Performance of our audit 

The audit of the Recruitment GB component was carried out by a 
Grant Thornton London based audit team. We engaged a different 
Grant Thornton UK team to audit the key component within the 
PeoplePlus segment and we engaged Grant Thornton Ireland to 
audit the key component in the Recruitment Ireland reporting 
segment. The group team performed reviews of the component 
auditors’ work. We determined the level of involvement we needed 
to have in their audit work at those reporting units to be able to 
conclude whether sufficient, appropriate audit evidence had 
been obtained as a basis for our opinion on the group financial 
statements as a whole. Detailed audit instructions were issued to 
the component auditors where a full scope audit approach had 
been identified. The audit instructions detailed the significant risks 
to be addressed through the audit procedures and indicated the 
information we required to be reported back to the group audit 
team. We were involved in the planning of the audit work for all full 
scope audit components and communicated with all component 
auditors throughout the planning, fieldwork and concluding stages 
of their audit work. 

Changes in approach from previous period 

•  Our approach to in scope components remains unchanged from 

the previous period.

Audit approach

Full-scope audit
Specific audit procedures
Analytical procedures

No. of 
components

% coverage  
Revenue

% coverage  
Loss before tax

4
1
12

90
2
8

74
7
19

Other information 
The directors are responsible for the other information. The other 
information comprises the information included in the annual report, 
other than the financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon. 
Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other 
information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated  
in our report, we do not express any form of assurance  
conclusion thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our 
responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, 
consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent 
with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit 
or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such 
material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we 
are required to determine whether there is a material misstatement 
in the financial statements or a material misstatement of the other 
information. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude 
that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we 
are required to report that fact. 

We have nothing to report in this regard.

Our opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies 
Act 2006 is unmodified 

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of 
the audit: 
• 

the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ 
report for the financial year for which the financial statements 
are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and 
the strategic report and the directors’ report have been prepared 
in accordance with applicable legal requirements.

• 

Matter on which we are required to report 
under the Companies Act 2006 
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and 
the parent company and its environment obtained in the course 
of the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in the 
strategic report or the directors’ report. 

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

75

Matters on which we are required to report 
by exception 
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in 
relation to which the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to 
you if, in our opinion: 
•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent 
company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been 
received from branches not visited by us; or 
the parent company financial statements are not in agreement 
with the accounting records and returns; or 

• 

•  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are 

not made; or 

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we 

• 

require for our audit. 

Responsibilities of directors for the 
financial statements 
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement, 
the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial 
statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is 
necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are 
free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. 

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible 
for assessing the group’s and the parent company’s ability to 
continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters 
related to going concern and using the going concern basis of 
accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the group 
or the parent company or to cease operations, or have no realistic 
alternative but to do so. 

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial statements 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether 
the financial statements as a whole are free from material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an 
auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance 
is a high level of assurance but is not a guarantee that an audit 
conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material 
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or 
error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, 
they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements. 

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial statements is located on the Financial Reporting Council’s 
website at: www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description 
forms part of our auditor’s report. 

Explanation as to what extent the audit was considered 
capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud 

Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance 
with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our 
responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements 
in respect of irregularities, including fraud. Owing to the inherent 

limitations of an audit, there is an unavoidable risk that material 
misstatements in the financial statements may not be detected,  
even though the audit is properly planned and performed in 
accordance with ISAs (UK). 

The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting 
irregularities, including fraud, is detailed below: 
•  We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory 

frameworks that are applicable to the group and determined 
that the most significant which are directly relevant to specific 
assertions in the financial statements are those related to the 
reporting frameworks (IFRS, the Companies Act 2006 and the 
QCA Corporate Governance Code). 
In addition, we concluded that there are certain significant laws 
and regulations that may have an effect on the determination of 
the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements and those 
laws and regulations relating to health and safety, employee 
matters, environmental, and bribery and corruption practices.

•  We understood how Staffline Group plc is complying with 

those legal and regulatory frameworks by making enquiries 
of management, internal audit, those responsible for legal 
and compliance procedures and the company secretary. We 
corroborated our enquiries through our review of board minutes, 
papers provided to the Audit Committee and correspondence 
received from regulatory bodies. 

•  We assessed the susceptibility of the group’s financial statements 

to material misstatement, including how fraud might occur, 
by evaluating management’s incentives and opportunities for 
manipulation of the financial statements. This included the 
evaluation of the risk of management override of controls. 
We determined that the principal risks were in relation to the 
estimation and judgemental areas with a risk of fraud including 
potential management bias of: 
 – Revenue journal entries to unexpected accounts within the 

recruitment segment, including those that reclassified costs 
from the income statement to the balance sheet; and 
 – potential management bias in determining accounting 
estimates, especially in relation to the determination of 
accrued income within PeoplePlus Group. 

•  Our audit procedures involved:  

 – evaluation of the design effectiveness and assessing the 

design effectiveness of controls that management has in place 
to prevent and detect fraud; 

 – using data interrogation software to perform journal entry 

testing, with a focus on material and other journals that met 
our unusual criteria, including those with unusual account 
combinations and those posted directly to the consolidation 
that increased revenue or that reclassified costs from the 
income statement to the balance sheet;  

 – challenging assumptions and judgements made by 

management in its significant accounting estimates including 
accrued income, and provisions made by management;  

 – testing the completeness of the group’s related party 

transactions through information obtained at the parent and 
component entities and testing that these transactions had a 
valid business purpose; and 

 – assessing the extent of compliance with the relevant laws and 
regulations as part of our procedures on the related financial 
statement item. 

76

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Independent Auditors Report continued
to the members of Staffline Group plc

Explanation as to what extent the audit was considered 
capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud 
continued

•  These audit procedures were designed to provide reasonable 
assurance that the financial statements were free from fraud 
or error. The risk of not detecting a material misstatement due 
to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting one resulting 
from error and detecting irregularities that result from fraud is 
inherently more difficult than detecting those that result from 
error, as fraud may involve collusion, deliberate concealment, 
forgery or intentional misrepresentations. Also, the further 
removed non-compliance with laws and regulations is from events 
and transactions reflected in the financial statements, the less 
likely we would become aware of it; 

•  The engagement partner assessed whether the engagement team 
collectively had the appropriate competence and capabilities to 
identify or recognise non-compliance with laws and regulations 
through the following: 
 – understanding of, and practical experience with audit 

engagements of a similar nature and complexity through 
appropriate training and participation; and 

 – knowledge of the industry in which the client operates. 
•  Matters in respect of potential non-compliance with laws 

and regulations and fraud included the potential for fraud in 
revenue recognition through manipulation of accrued income in 
PeoplePlus Group, and manipulation of recruitment revenue have 
been communicated with the audit team. This is also reported as 
a key audit matter in the key audit matter section of our report 
where the matter and specific procedures were performed in 
response to this matter is described in more detail. 

•  For components at which audit procedures were performed, we 
requested component auditors to report to us instances of non-
compliance with laws and regulations that gave rise to a risk of 
material misstatement of the group financial statements.

Use of our report 
This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in 
accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. 
Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to 
the company’s members those matters we are required to state to 
them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest 
extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility 
to anyone other than the company and the company’s members 
as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions 
we have formed. 

Marc Summers, BSc (Hons), FCA 
Senior Statutory Auditor 
for and on behalf of Grant Thornton UK LLP 
Statutory Auditor, Chartered Accountants 
London 
21 March 2022

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

77

Financial Statements

Inside this 
section

Financial Statements

78  Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income

79  Consolidated Statement of Changes  

in Equity

80  Company Statement of Changes in Equity 
81  Consolidated and Company Statements 

of Financial Position

82  Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
83  Notes to the Financial Statements
123  Five-year summary of financial data
124  Company Details

78

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
for the year ended 31 December 2021

Continuing operations

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit

Administrative expenses

Operating profit/(loss)

Underlying operating profit before non-underlying administrative expenses
Administrative expenses (non-underlying)

Operating profit/(loss)

Finance costs - underlying
Finance costs – refinancing costs (non-underlying)

Finance costs

Loss for the year before taxation

Tax credit

Profit/(loss) from continuing activities

Loss from discontinued operations

Profit/(loss) for the year

Items that will not be reclassified to profit and loss – actuarial gains/(losses), net of tax 

Items that may be reclassified to profit and loss – cumulative translation loss

Total comprehensive profit/(loss) for the year

Earnings/(loss) per ordinary share
Continuing operations: Basic and diluted
Discontinued operations: Basic and diluted

Total earnings/(loss) per share: Basic and diluted

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Note

2021
£m

2020
£m

4
5

5

5

6

8

10

9

942.7
(859.9)

82.8

(80.5)

2.3

10.3
(8.0)

2.3

(2.4)
–

(2.4)

(0.1)

1.7

1.6

(0.4)

1.2

0.7

(0.3)

1.6

927.6
(853.0)

74.6

(118.9)

(44.3)

4.8
(49.1)

(44.3)

(4.1)
(3.2)

(7.3)

(51.6)

3.1

(48.5)

(4.2)

(52.7)

(0.8)

(0.1)

(53.6)

1.3p
(0.3)p

1.0p

(71.5)p
(6.2)p

(77.7)p

 
 
Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

79

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
for the year ended 31 December 2021

At 31 December 2019 (reported)

Prior year adjustment (note 3)

At 1 January 2020 (restated)

Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share scheme – equity-settled

Transactions with owners

Loss for the year
Actuarial loss on pension scheme, net of taxation
Cumulative translation adjustments

Total comprehensive loss for the year, net of tax

At 31 December 2020 (reported)

Prior year adjustment (note 3)

At 31 December 2020 (restated)

Cancellation of JSOP shares
Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share scheme – equity-settled
Proceeds from share issue

Transactions with owners

Profit for the year
Cash flow hedge reserve
Actuarial gain on pension scheme, net of taxation
Cumulative translation adjustments

Total comprehensive income for the year, net of tax

Share 
capital
£m

6.9

–

6.9

–

–

–
–
–

–

6.9

–

6.9

–
–
9.7

9.7

–
–
–
–

–

Own 
shares 
JSOP
£m

(4.8)

–

(4.8)

–

–

–
–
–

–

(4.8)

–

(4.8)

–
–
–

–

–
–
–
–

–

Share 
premium
£m

75.1

–

75.1

–

–

–
–
–

–

75.1

–

75.1

–
–
36.7

36.7

–
–
–
–

–

Share-
based 
payment
 reserve
£m

Cash flow 
hedge 
reserve
£m

Profit 
and loss 
account
£m

Total 
equity
£m

75.8

(2.3)

73.5

–

–

(52.7)
(0.8)
(0.1)

(53.6)

22.2

(2.3)

19.9

–
0.1
46.4

46.5

1.2
0.2
0.7
(0.3)

1.8

(1.9)

(2.3)

(4.2)

(0.1)

(0.1)

(52.7)
(0.8)
(0.1)

(53.6)

(55.6)

(2.3)

(57.9)

0.4
–
–

0.4

1.2
–
0.7
(0.3)

1.6

0.5

–

0.5

0.1

0.1

–
–
–

–

0.6

–

0.6

(0.4)
0.1
–

(0.3)

–
–
–
–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
–
–

–

–

–

–

–
–
–

–

–
0.2
–
–

0.2

0.2

At 31 December 2021

16.6

(4.8)

111.8

0.3

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

(55.9)

68.2

80

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Company Statement of Changes in Equity
For the year ended 31 December 2021

At 1 January 2020

Profit for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year, net of tax

At 31 December 2020

Proceeds from share issue

Transactions with owners

Profit for the year
Cash flow hedge reserve

Total comprehensive income for the year, net of tax

Share 
capital
£m

6.9

–

–

6.9

9.7

9.7

–
–

–

Own 
shares 
JSOP
£m

(4.8)

–

–

(4.8)

–

–

–
–

–

Share 
premium
£m

75.1

–

–

75.1

36.7

36.7

–
–

–

At 31 December 2021

16.6

(4.8)

111.8

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Cash flow 
hedge  
reserve
£m

–

–

–

–

–

–

–
0.2

0.2

0.2

Profit 
and loss 
account
£m

(39.2)

13.5

13.5

(25.7)

–

–

1.4
–

1.4

Total 
equity
£m

38.0

13.5

13.5

51.5

46.4

46.4

1.4
0.2

1.6

(24.3)

99.5

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

81

Consolidated and Company Statements of Financial Position
as at 31 December 2021

Note

11
12
13
14
24

17

18
19
19

17

20
21
22
23
15

21
22
23
15
24

25

Assets
Non-current
Goodwill
Other intangible assets
Investments
Property, plant and equipment
Deferred tax asset 

Current
Trade and other receivables
Current tax asset
Derivative financial instruments
Cash and cash equivalents
Restricted cash

Debtors: amounts falling due after more than one year

Total assets

Liabilities
Current
Trade and other payables
Borrowings
Other liabilities
Provisions
Lease liabilities

Non-current
Borrowings
Other liabilities
Provisions
Lease liabilities
Deferred tax liabilities

Total liabilities

Equity
Share capital
Own shares
Share premium 
Share-based payment reserve
Cash flow hedge reserve
Profit and loss account

Total equity

Total equity and liabilities

Consolidated

2020
Restated
£m

2019
Restated
£m

2021
£m

59.6
16.5
–
8.0
4.6

88.7

116.2
0.6
0.5
29.8
–

147.1

–

235.8

134.3
22.9
–
1.4
1.3

159.9

–
0.3
1.4
3.3
2.7

7.7

59.6
24.3
–
9.6
4.4

97.9

104.8
1.7
–
24.5
0.9

131.9

–

229.8

155.6
13.0
–
3.8
1.6

174.0

20.0
7.3
1.2
3.9
3.5

35.9

167.6

209.9

16.6
(4.8)
111.8
0.3
0.2
(55.9)

68.2

235.8

6.9
(4.8)
75.1
0.6
–
(57.9)

19.9

229.8

94.9
34.0

14.6
1.4

144.9

132.4
5.3
–
25.0
12.7

175.4

–

320.3

128.7
6.4
0.7
16.0
2.6

154.4

78.1
1.4
2.4
5.8
4.7

92.4

246.8

6.9
(4.8)
75.1
0.5
–
(4.2)

73.5

320.3

Company

2021
£m

–
–
67.8
–
0.8

68.6

3.0
–
0.5
–
–

3.5

30.8

102.9

3.4
–
–
–
–

3.4

–
–
–
–
–

–

3.4

16.6
(4.8)
111.8
–
0.2
(24.3)

99.5

102.9

2020
£m

–
–
67.8
–
–

67.8

7.7
0.2
–
–
–

7.9

–

75.7

3.8
–
–
–
–

3.8

20.0
0.4
–
–
–

20.4

24.2

6.9
(4.8)
75.1
–
–
(25.7)

51.5

75.7

The Company has taken advantage of Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 and has not included its own profit and loss account 
in these financial statements. The Company’s profit for the year was £1.4m (2020: profit of £13.5m). The accompanying notes form an 
integral part of these financial statements.

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 21 March 2022 and signed on their behalf by:

Albert Ellis 
Director  
21 March 2022 

Daniel Quint
Director
21 March 2022

 
 
 
 
 
 
82

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
for the year ended 31 December 2021

Cash flows from operating activities 

Taxation received/(paid)

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities – trading
Purchases of property, plant and equipment
Sale of property, plant and equipment
Purchase of intangible assets – software
Cash flows from investing activities – acquisitions
Acquisition of businesses – deferred consideration for prior year acquisitions

Total cash flows arising from investing activities

Total cash flows arising from operating and investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
New loans (net of refinancing costs)
Net movements on Receivables Finance Agreement
Loan repayments
Principal repayment of lease liabilities
Interest paid
Payment from restricted fund
Settlement of NMW liabilities from restricted fund
Gross proceeds from the issue of share capital
Costs relating to the issue of share capital

Net cash flows from financing activities

Net change in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

Note

30

8

14

12

31

21
21
21
15

19

25
25

19

2021
£m

(28.7)

5.8

(22.9)

(2.4)
–
(2.1)

–

(4.5)

(27.4)

–
9.9
(20.0)
(1.7)
(1.9)
0.9
(0.9)
48.4
(2.0)

32.7

5.3

24.5

29.8

2020
£m

65.8

(0.5)

65.3

(1.3)
0.2
(1.3)

(0.3)

(2.7)

62.6

43.0
(29.7)
(58.1)
(3.4)
(8.5)
11.8
(11.8)
–
–

(56.7)

5.9

18.6

24.5

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

83

Notes to the Financial Statements
the year ended 31 December 2021

1 Nature of operations
The principal activities of Staffline Group plc and its subsidiaries (the “Group”) include the provision of recruitment and outsourced 
human resource services to industry and the provision of skills and employment training and support. 

2 General information and statement of compliance 
Staffline Group plc, a Public Limited Company limited by shares listed on AIM (the “Company”), is incorporated and domiciled in 
England, United Kingdom. The Company acts as the holding company of the Group. The registered office and principal place of 
business of the Group and its subsidiary companies is disclosed on the Company details page to these financial statements, page 124, 
and within note 13. The Company’s registration number is 05268636.

The financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2021 (including the comparatives for the year ended 31 December 2020) were 
approved and authorised for issue by the Board of Directors on 21 March 2022.

There have been no new accounting standards that have required adoption in the current year. 

The Company does not have an ultimate controlling party. As noted on page 62, the largest shareholder held 15.97% of the Company’s 
issued share capital as at 31 December 2021.

3 Accounting policies
Basis of preparation

The Consolidated financial statements are prepared for the year ended 31 December 2021. The Consolidated financial statements of the 
Group have been prepared on a going concern basis using the significant accounting policies and measurement bases summarised below, 
and in accordance with international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. The financial 
statements are prepared under the historical cost convention except for equity-settled share options and derivative financial instruments, 
which are measured at fair value.

The Company financial statements of Staffline Group plc have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance 
with Financial Reporting Standard 101 (“FRS 101”) and the Companies Act 2006. The following exemptions from the requirements of IFRS 
have been applied in the preparation of these financial statements, in accordance with FRS 101:
•  Paragraphs 45(b) and 46 to 52 of IFRS 2, Share-based Payment (details of the number and weighted-average exercise prices of share 

options, and how the fair value of goods or services received was determined);
IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures;

• 
•  Paragraphs 91 to 99 of IFRS 13, Fair Value Measurement (disclosure of valuation techniques and inputs used for fair value 

measurement of assets and liabilities);

•  Paragraph 38 of IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements comparative information requirements in respect of:

 – paragraph 79(a)(iv) of IAS 1;
 – paragraph 73(e) of IAS 16;
 – paragraph 118(e) of IAS 38;
 – requirements of paragraphs 62 and B64 of IFRS 3 Business Combinations; and
 – paragraph 33(c) of IFRS 5

•  The following paragraphs of IAS 1, Presentation of Financial Statements:

 – 10(d) (statement of cash flows);
 – 10(f) (a statement of financial position as at the beginning of the preceding period when an entity applies an accounting policy 

retrospectively or makes a retrospective restatement of items in its financial statements, or when it reclassifies items in its financial 
statements);

 – 16 (statement of compliance with all IFRS);
 – 38A (requirement for minimum of two primary statements, including cash flow statements);
 – 38B-D (additional comparative information);
 – 40A-D (requirements for a third statement of financial position);
 – 111 (cash flow statement information); and
 – 134-136 (capital management disclosures).
IAS 7, Statement of Cash Flows;

• 
•  Paragraphs 30 and 31 of IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors (requirement for the disclosure of 

information when an entity has not applied a new IFRS that has been issued but is not yet effective);

•  Paragraph 17 of IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures (key management compensation); and
•  The requirements in IAS 24, Related Party Disclosures to disclose related party transactions entered into between two or more 

members of a group.

84

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

3 Accounting policies continued
Basis of preparation continued

At the date of authorisation of these financial statements, there were no new Standards or amendments to existing Standards and 
Interpretations that became effective in the year. No Standards or amendments to existing Standards have been adopted early by the Group.

The Directors anticipate that all relevant pronouncements will be adopted for the first period beginning on or after the effective date of 
the pronouncement. New Standards, amendments and Interpretations not adopted in the current year have not been disclosed as they 
are not expected to have a material impact on the Group’s financial statements.

The Consolidated and Company financial statements are presented in sterling, which is the functional currency of the parent Company 
and Group. The principal accounting policies of the Group and Company are set out below and have been consistently applied, unless 
stated otherwise.

Going concern

The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position are set out in 
the Chief Executive Officer’s Review on pages 8 to 11. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing 
facilities are described in the Financial Review on pages 20 to 25. The principal risks and uncertainties to which the Group is exposed are 
described on pages 38 to 45.

As described in the Chief Executive Officer’s Review, despite the challenging trading conditions experienced across all divisions in the 
Group during 2021, the Group reported an underlying operating profit for the year on continuing activities. In the recruitment divisions, 
the impact of Covid-19 was mixed following the gradual return to work for most sectors, which was accompanied by unexpected high 
levels of labour shortages, especially in logistics-based sectors. The Group’s PeoplePlus division continued to be impacted by the 
disruption to its training programmes, with a gradual return to some face-to-face training, which accelerated in the second half of the 
year. The Directors continued to enable the majority of the Group’s permanent staff to work from home and provided additional support 
with Covid-secure working practices implemented at customers’ premises.

Trading volumes in the first half of the year were impacted by the pandemic, with a relatively modest recovery in the second half. The 
Directors maintained tight cost control throughout with overheads at reduced levels, additionally benefiting from previous restructuring 
programmes. These initiatives resulted in improved performance in the second half of the year as lockdown restrictions eased, resulting 
in underlying profit and positive cash generation.

The Directors had previously highlighted that the Group’s financial forecasts indicated a liquidity issue in early 2021 when VAT of £46.5m, 
deferred from the period between March to June 2020, may have had to be repaid. On 24 September 2020, the UK Government 
announced that an instalment payment scheme would be introduced, and details of the final scheme were published on 23 February 
2021. The revised repayment profile of equal instalments over eight months commencing June 2021 had the effect of delaying the 
potential liquidity shortfall from March 2021 to later in the year. 

In order to address the anticipated liquidity shortfall, the Directors engaged professional advisers in late 2020 to assess the Group’s 
options for refinancing its debt facilities and to engage with potential lenders. On 20 May 2021, following a detailed appraisal by the 
Directors, the Company and certain subsidiary undertakings, entered into a new £90m Receivables Financing Agreement (“RFA”) to 
replace the existing Group funding arrangements. The RFA contained certain requirements to be met before completion, the most 
significant of which was that the Company raise new equity capital of at least £40.0m. This condition was satisfied and the RFA became 
effective on 10 June 2021.

The new facility enabled the cancellation of the existing facilities, comprising the RCF of £20.0m and the RFF of £68.2m and also 
the non-recourse Receivables Purchase Facility of £25.0m. The Group continues to have access to its existing customer financing 
arrangements in respect of specific customers, under which invoices are settled in advance of normal credit terms. 

The Group announced a proposed Placing, Subscription and Open Offer (the “Fundraise”) on 21 May 2021 following conditional 
agreement of the debt refinancing. The Fundraise comprised the following elements:
•  A total of 87,249,500 new ordinary shares of 10 pence each placed at a price of 50 pence per share (the “Issue Price”) to certain 

existing shareholders, new institutional investors and certain Directors and employees of the Group;

•  A total of 750,500 new ordinary shares of 10 pence each to certain Directors and employees of the Group at the issue price, and;
•  An open offer to existing shareholders of 10 shares for every 78 ordinary shares held, for a total of 8,837,242 new ordinary shares  

of 10 pence each at the issue price.

The total proceeds of the Fundraise, which was approved by the shareholders in a General Meeting on 9 June 2021, was £48.4m.  
The total cost of the Fundraise and debt refinancing was £4.0m. The net proceeds were used to reduce total indebtedness and to  
provide working capital for growth.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

85

The Directors have prepared updated forecasts and cash flow projections to 31 December 2023, which is considered to be a 
reasonable period over which a reasonable view can be formed. These forecasts have been used to assess going concern and have  
been stress-tested by applying basic sensitivity analysis, involving a reduction to revenues across all three divisions, over the period  
to 31 December 2023. 

In forming their opinion, the Directors have performed a robust assessment of the principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group as 
set out on pages 38 to 45. In addition, note 29 to the accounts includes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its 
capital; its financial risk management objectives; and its exposure to credit risk and liquidity risk. Consequently, the Directors believe 
that the Group is well placed to manage its business risks successfully.

At 31 December 2021, the Group had net cash of £6.9m (2020: net debt of £(8.8)m), on a pre-IFRS 16 basis, and following the debt 
refinancing has committed facilities until 1 December 2025. For the period to 31 December 2023, the Group’s cash flow forecasts indicate 
ongoing headroom in the Receivables Finance Agreement and also full compliance with the financial covenants contained therein. The 
Group has sufficient day to day liquidity to ensure that short-term liabilities can be satisfied as and when they fall due. Further details 
of the financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are described in the Financial Review on 
pages 20 to 25.

As a result, the Directors have formed a judgement, at the time of approving the financial statements, that there is a reasonable 
expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence and meet its liabilities as they fall due over  
the assessment period. The Directors have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually  
or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least 18 months from 
when the financial statements are authorised for issue. For this reason, the Directors continue to adopt the going concern basis in 
preparing the financial statements.

86

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

3 Accounting policies continued
Prior year restatement

During the year a customer undertook a review of amounts claimed by PeoplePlus over the duration of the customer contract, which 
began in 2019. The review revealed that a number of records that are required to substantiate revenue claims were incomplete and 
as such revenue was recognised in error. The records related to 2019 and will require the repayment of £2.3m of revenue. Based on its 
legacy nature, this has been adjusted through reserves. Of the £2.3m, £0.8m has already been repaid in 2021, with the balance paid 
in February 2022.

The required adjustment is set out in the table below; Other payables understated by £2.3m.

Restatement of Consolidated statement of financial position:
As at 1 January 2020 and at 31 December 2020

Assets
Non-current
Goodwill
Other intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Deferred tax asset 

Current

Total assets

Liabilities
Current
Trade and other payables
Borrowings
Other liabilities
Provisions
Lease liabilities

Non-current
Borrowings
Other liabilities
Provisions
Lease liabilities
Deferred tax liabilities

Total liabilities

Equity
Share capital
Own shares
Share premium 
Share-based payment reserve
Profit and loss account

Total equity

Total equity and liabilities

2019 
Reported
£m

Revenue 
overclaimed
£m

2019 
Restated
£m

2020 
Reported
£m

Revenue 
overclaimed
£m

2020 
Restated
£m

94.9
34.0
14.6
1.4

144.9

175.4

320.3

126.4
6.4
0.7
16.0
2.6

152.1

78.1
1.4
2.4
5.8
4.7

92.4

244.5

6.9
(4.8)
75.1
0.5
(1.9)

75.8

320.3

–
–
–
–

–

–

–

2.3
–
–
–
–

2.3

–
–
–
–
–

–

2.3

–
–
–
–
(2.3)

(2.3)

–

94.9
34.0
14.6
1.4

144.9

175.4

320.3

128.7
6.4
0.7
16.0
2.6

154.4

78.1
1.4
2.4
5.8
4.7

92.4

246.8

6.9
(4.8)
75.1
0.5
(4.2)

73.5

320.3

59.6
24.3
9.6
4.4

97.9

131.9

229.8

153.3
13.0
–
3.8
1.6

171.7

20.0
7.3
1.2
3.9
3.5

35.9

–
–
–
–

–

–

–

2.3
–
–
–
–

2.3

–
–
–
–
–

–

59.6
24.3
9.6
4.4

97.9

131.9

229.8

155.6
13.0
–
3.8
1.6

174.0

20.0
7.3
1.2
3.9
3.5

35.9

207.6

2.3

209.9

6.9
(4.8)
75.1
0.6
(55.6)

22.2

229.8

–
–
–
–
(2.3)

(2.3)

–

6.9
(4.8)
75.1
0.6
(57.9)

19.9

229.8

 
Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

87

Consolidation of subsidiaries

The Group financial statements consolidate those of the parent Company and all of its subsidiaries as at 31 December 2021 in 
accordance with IFRS 10. Subsidiaries are all entities to which the Group is exposed to or has rights to variable returns and the ability 
to affect those returns through control over the subsidiary. The results of subsidiaries whose accounts are prepared in a currency other 
than sterling are translated at the average rates of exchange during the period and their year-end balances at the year-end rate of 
exchange. Translation adjustments are taken to the profit and loss reserves.

Material intra-group balances and transactions, and any unrealised gains or losses arising from intra-group transactions, are eliminated 
in preparing these financial statements.

Non-GAAP measures of performance

In the reporting of its financial performance, the Group uses certain measures that are not defined under IFRS, the Generally Accepted 
Accounting Principles (“GAAP”) under which the Group reports. The Directors believe that these non-GAAP measures assist with the 
understanding of the performance of the business. These non-GAAP measures are not a substitute, or superior to, any IFRS measures of 
performance but they have been included as the Directors consider them to be an important means of comparing performance year-
on-year and they include key measures used within the business for assessing performance. 

Non-underlying items of income and expenditure
Non-underlying charges are regarded as either recurring or non-recurring items of income or expenditure of a particular size and/or 
nature relating to the operations of the business that in the Directors’ opinion require separate identification. These items are included 
in “total” reported results but are excluded from “underlying” results. These items can vary significantly from year to year and therefore 
create volatility in reported earnings. 

Underlying EBITDA
Underlying operating profit before the deduction of underlying depreciation and amortisation charges. This is considered a useful 
measure because it approximates the underlying cash flow by eliminating depreciation and amortisation charges.

Net debt
Net debt is the amount of bank debt less available cash balances excluding escrow funds. This is a key measure as it is one on which the 
terms of the banking facilities are based and shows the level of external debt utilised by the Group to fund operations. Net debt is also 
presented on a pre-IFRS 16 basis which excludes lease liabilities.

The Directors acknowledge that the adjustments made to arrive at underlying profit may not be comparable to those made by other 
companies, mainly in respect of the adjustment for share-based payment charges including both equity and cash-settled components. 
It should be noted that whilst the amortisation of acquisition-related intangible assets has been added back, the revenue from those 
acquisitions has not been eliminated.

All of these alternative performance measures are utilised by the Board to monitor performance and financial position. They show a 
comparable level of performance excluding one-off items, with which underlying performance and ability to service debt can be judged.

Business combinations

The Group applies the acquisition method in accounting for business combinations. The consideration transferred by the Group to 
obtain control of a subsidiary is calculated as the sum of the acquisition-date fair value of assets transferred, liabilities incurred and the 
equity interests of the Group, which includes the fair value of any asset or liability arising from a contingent consideration arrangement. 
Acquisition costs are expensed as incurred.

Goodwill is stated after separate recognition of identifiable intangible assets. It is calculated as the sum of a) fair value of consideration 
transferred, b) the recognised amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree and c) acquisition-date fair value of any existing 
equity interest in the acquiree, over the acquisition-date fair values of identifiable net assets. If the fair values of identifiable net assets 
exceed the sum calculated above, the excess amount (i.e. gain on a bargain purchase) is recognised in the statement of comprehensive 
income immediately.

Segment reporting

The Group has three material operating segments: the provision of recruitment and outsourced human resource services to industry, 
in Great Britain (Recruitment GB) and also in Ireland (Recruitment Ireland), plus the provision of skills and employment training and 
support, together “PeoplePlus”. Each of these operating segments is managed separately as each requires different technologies, 
marketing approaches and other resources. For management purposes, the Group uses the same measurement policies as those used  
in its financial statements. 

88

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

3 Accounting policies continued
Revenue recognition
Recruitment divisions
Income from the provision of temporary contractors is recognised as services are rendered, based on hours worked multiplied by the 
contracted hourly rate, net of rebates. In the case of temporary contractors, there is deemed to be one performance obligation, being 
the satisfactory completion of the daily hours. Income from permanent placements is recognised when the candidates start work, since 
there is deemed to be one performance obligation, being the commencement of employment of the worker. In the occasional instances 
where a permanent worker is deemed to be unsatisfactory and a suitable replacement cannot be found, a credit will be issued. No 
provision is held for this since the amounts are not material. In each case, revenue is only recognised when the labour or service has 
been provided and the Group is contractually entitled to the revenue.

Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable for the supply of services, net of value added tax, 
rebates and discounts and after eliminating sales within the Group. Provisions for rebates are accounted for in the period to which the 
sale relates and are calculated in accordance with the contractual arrangements in place. The rebate provision recognised is the full 
amount invoiced less the potential impact of other reasonably foreseen constraints. Management calculates an estimate of the most 
likely amount of the rebate based upon the terms agreed within the contract and adopts a prudent approach.

The Group assesses whether it is acting as agent or principal depending on whether the customer has a direct relationship with 
the Group, whether the Group has the primary responsibility for providing the services and whether the Group has control over the 
placement of the worker. Where the Group acts as a principal in the supply, revenue is recognised as the gross amount due, net of 
value-added tax, rebates and discounts. The Recruitment GB division has a limited number of second tier arrangements whereby 
another recruitment company will provide contractors to the Group to enable the Group to fulfil a customer’s requirement. Where this 
arrangement constitutes an agency relationship rather than principal, the amount of revenue recognised is limited to the management 
fee or margin receivable for that service after making provision for any losses foreseen, volume rebates and any other amounts payable, 
rather than the full amount invoiced. Trade receivables and payables related to these sales are recorded at full invoice value.

The Recruitment division recognises contract assets to reflect revenue recorded in relation to work that is part way through completion of 
a performance obligation and is yet to be invoiced. 

Contract liabilities are short-term in nature (less than one year) and are recognised in the profit and loss account in the year following 
recognition.

PeoplePlus division
Income is generated from skills-based contracts, and the provision of welfare to work services. The segment recognises revenue upon 
fulfilment of the performance obligation, being the provision of a specified individual level of training, support or advice for a person 
enrolled in the programme. There is one contract that has more than one performance obligation, however, the revenue was not material 
in either the current or prior years.

For contracts where the contractual obligation relates to providing individuals with training, support or advice for a specific period of 
time, ranging between 3-24 months, the revenue is recognised over time as this reflects when the individual receives the benefit, and the 
end client is simultaneously receiving and consuming the benefits provided by PeoplePlus’ performance. Progress towards satisfaction 
of the performance obligation is determined based upon, for example, activities carried out. Where income is received in advance this 
is initially held in the statement of financial position as deferred income and released to the statement of comprehensive income as 
services are provided. Accrued income is recognised where services have been provided in advance of invoiced income and, based on 
all available evidence, the division expects to receive payment in accordance with the contract.

Revenue is accounted for over the period the services are provided in accordance with IFRS 15, including where the outcomes are 
variable in nature. There are a few contracts that have a variable element of revenue associated with them, for example one contract 
has an element of payment by results and potential penalties if insufficient activities are carried out. Detailed management information 
is used to support the basis of the variable element of the revenue recognition calculation to provide the most likely amount. This will 
take into account historical experience, as well as future expectations in terms of success rates and the anticipated length of period over 
which the services are ultimately provided and ensure that a prudent approach is adopted.

In the early stages of a contract it may be difficult to reasonably measure the outcome of a performance obligation. During this period, 
revenue is recognised only to the extent of the costs incurred until such time that the outcome of the performance obligations can be 
reasonably measured. Where income is received in advance, this is initially held in the statement of financial position as deferred income 
and released to the statement of comprehensive income as services are provided. Accrued income is recognised where services have 
been provided in advance of invoiced income.

In some instances the division receives income before the performance obligations have been fully satisfied. Accordingly, Income received 
in advance is held in the statement of financial position. See note 20.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

89

Operating expenses 

Operating expenses are recognised in the statement of comprehensive income when incurred and are classified according to 
their nature. 

Furlough claims

Where the Group has been entitled to receive a government grant, it has determined the treatment of the grant under either a capital 
approach or the income approach. The Group has only been in receipt of grants determined as appropriate to account for under the income 
approach. The grant income has been matched with the related costs, for which they are intended to compensate, on a systematic basis. 
The grant income has only been recognised where there is reasonable assurance that the Group will comply with all conditions attached 
to the grant and that the grant will be received. During the year, the Group utilised the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (“CJRS”) in the 
UK and claimed and received a total of £1.6m (2020: £31.4m). At the year-end there were no outstanding amounts receivable. There are no 
unfulfilled conditions and contingencies attached to the grants recognised within these financial statements.

Goodwill

Goodwill represents the excess of the fair value of the cost of a business acquisition over the Group’s share of the fair value of assets 
and liabilities acquired as at the date of acquisition. Goodwill is tested annually for impairment and carried at historic fair value less 
accumulated impairment losses.

Intangible assets
Assets acquired as part of a business combination
In accordance with IFRS 3 Business Combinations, an intangible asset acquired in a business combination is deemed to have a cost 
to the Group of its fair value at the acquisition date. The fair value of the intangible asset reflects market expectations about the 
probability that the future economic benefits embodied in the asset will flow to the Group. An independent valuation is undertaken  
in order to assess the fair value of intangible assets acquired in a business combination. 

The fair value is then amortised over the expected useful economic life of the asset as detailed below. Where an intangible asset might 
be separable, but only together with a related tangible or intangible asset, the group of assets is recognised as a single asset separately 
from goodwill where the individual fair values of the assets in the Group are not reliably measurable. Where the individual fair values 
of the complementary assets are reliably measurable, the Group recognises them as a single asset provided the individual assets have 
similar useful lives.

Customer contracts, customer lists, brands and licences
The fair value of acquired customer contracts, customer lists, brands and licences is capitalised and, subject to impairment reviews, 
amortised over their estimated lives (estimated to be five years). The amortisation is calculated so as to write off their fair value less  
their estimated residual values over their estimated lives. An impairment review is undertaken when events or circumstances indicate  
the carrying amount may not be recoverable.

Computer software
Computer software is carried at historical cost less subsequent amortisation and impairment losses. Amortisation is charged on the cost 
less the estimated residual value, which is assessed annually, of these assets on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful economic 
life of each asset.

The useful lives of computer software are three to five years and are amortised on a straight-line basis.

Property, plant and equipment

Freehold land and property, computer equipment, fixtures and fittings and motor vehicles are carried at acquisition cost less subsequent 
depreciation and impairment losses. Depreciation is charged on the cost less the estimated residual value, which is assessed annually,  
of these assets over the estimated useful economic life of each asset.

The estimated useful economic lives of property, plant and equipment and the depreciation basis can be summarised as follows:

Land and buildings 
Computer equipment 
Fixtures and fittings 
Motor vehicles 

50 years straight-line
3-5 years straight-line
3-5 years straight-line
25% reducing balance

Right-of-use assets are depreciated over their lease term. Assets in the course of construction are not depreciated until they are 
available for use.

 
90

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

3 Accounting policies continued
Impairment assessment

Goodwill, other intangible assets and property, plant and equipment are subject to impairment testing.

For the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable cash 
flows (cash-generating units). As a result, some assets are tested individually for impairment and some are tested at cash-generating 
unit level. Goodwill is allocated to those cash-generating units that are expected to benefit from synergies of the related business 
combination and represent the lowest level within the Group at which management monitors the related cash flows.

Individual intangible assets or cash-generating units that include goodwill with an indefinite useful life are tested for impairment at least 
annually. All other individual assets or cash-generating units are tested for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances 
indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable.

An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s or cash-generating unit’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable 
amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of fair value, reflecting market conditions less costs to sell, and value-in-use based on an 
internal discounted cash flow evaluation. Impairment losses recognised for cash-generating units, to which goodwill has been allocated, 
are credited initially to the carrying amount of goodwill. Any remaining impairment loss is charged pro rata to the other assets in the 
cash-generating unit. With the exception of goodwill, all assets are subsequently reassessed for indications that an impairment loss 
previously recognised may no longer exist.

Investments

Investments in the subsidiary undertakings are held at cost less provision for impairment. 

Leases

The Group is not party to any material leases where it acts as a lessor, but the Group does have a large number of material property 
and equipment leases, under which it is a lessee.

Following the adoption of IFRS 16, for any new contracts entered into on or after 1 January 2019, the Group considers whether a contract 
is, or contains a lease. A lease is defined as “a contract, or part of a contract, that conveys the right to use an asset (the underlying 
asset) for a period of time in exchange for consideration”. To apply this definition the Group assesses whether the contract meets three 
key evaluations which are whether:
•  The contract contains an identified asset, which is either explicitly identified in the contract or implicitly specified by being identified 

at the time the asset is made available to the Group;

•  The Group has the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of the identified asset throughout the period of 

use, considering its rights within the defined scope of the contract; and

•  The Group has the right to direct the use of the identified asset throughout the period of use. The Group assess whether it has the 

right to direct “how and for what purpose” the asset is used throughout the period of use. 

Measurement and recognition of leases as a lessee
At lease commencement date, the Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability on the balance sheet. The right-of-use 
asset is measured at cost, which is made up of the initial measurement of the lease liability, any initial direct costs incurred by the 
Group, an estimate of any costs to dismantle and remove the asset at the end of the lease, and any lease payments made in advance 
of the lease commencement date (net of any incentives received). The Group depreciates the right-of-use assets on a straight-line basis 
from the lease commencement date to the earlier of the end of the useful life of the right-of-use asset or the end of the lease term.  
The Group also assesses the right-of-use asset for impairment when such indicators exist.

At the commencement date, the Group measures the lease liability at the present value of the lease payments unpaid at that date, 
discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease if that rate is readily available or the Group’s incremental borrowing rate. Lease 
payments included in the measurement of the lease liability are made up of fixed payments (including in substance fixed), variable 
payments based on an index or rate, amounts expected to be payable under a residual value guarantee and payments arising from 
options reasonably certain to be exercised.

Subsequent to initial measurement, the liability will be reduced for payments made and increased for interest. It is remeasured to reflect 
any reassessment or modification, or if there are changes in in-substance fixed payments. When the lease liability is remeasured, the 
corresponding adjustment is reflected in the right-of-use asset, or profit and loss if the right-of-use asset is already reduced to zero.

The Group has elected to account for short-term leases and leases of low-value assets using the practical expedients. Instead of 
recognising a right-of-use asset and lease liability, the payments in relation to these are recognised as an expense in profit or loss  
on a straight-line basis over the lease term.

On the statement of financial position, right-of-use assets are included in property, plant and equipment and lease liabilities are 
disclosed separately.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

91

Taxation

Current income tax assets and/or liabilities comprise those obligations to, or claims from, fiscal authorities relating to the current or prior 
reporting period, that are unpaid at the balance sheet date. They are calculated according to the tax rates and tax laws applicable to 
the fiscal periods to which they relate, based on the taxable profit or loss for the year.

Deferred income taxes are calculated using the liability method on temporary differences. This involves the comparison of the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities in the Consolidated financial statements with their respective tax bases. However, in accordance 
with the rules set out in IAS 12, no deferred taxes are recognised on the initial recognition of goodwill. This applies also to temporary 
differences associated with shares in subsidiaries if reversal of these temporary differences can be controlled by the Group and it is 
probable that reversal will not occur in the foreseeable future. In addition, tax losses available to be carried forward as well as other 
income tax credits to the Group are assessed for recognition as deferred tax assets.

Deferred tax liabilities are provided for in full if material. Deferred tax assets are recognised if it is probable that they will be able to 
be offset against future taxable income. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are calculated, without discounting, at tax rates that are 
expected to apply to their respective period of realisation, provided they are enacted or substantively enacted at the statement of 
financial position date.

Most changes in deferred tax assets or liabilities are recognised as a component of tax expense in the profit or loss. Only changes in 
deferred tax assets or liabilities that relate to a change in value of assets or liabilities that are charged directly in other comprehensive 
income or equity are charged or credited directly to other comprehensive income or equity.

Cash and cash equivalents

For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents include cash at bank and in hand and overdrafts which are 
repayable on demand. Cash held in escrow is excluded from net debt.

Pensions

The Group contributes to a number of pension arrangements. The schemes are generally funded through payments to insurance 
companies or trustee-administered funds, determined by periodic actuarial calculations. The Group has both defined contribution and 
defined benefit plans. A defined contribution plan is a pension plan under which the Group pays fixed contributions into a separate 
entity. The Group has no legal or constructive obligation to pay further contributions if the fund does not hold sufficient assets to pay 
all employees the benefits relating to employee service in the current and prior periods. A defined benefit plan is a pension plan that is 
not a defined contribution plan. Typically, defined benefit plans define an amount of pension benefit that an employee will receive on 
retirement, usually dependent on one or more factors such as age, years of service and compensation.

Defined benefit plan
The liability recognised in the balance sheet in respect of defined benefit pension plans is the present value of the defined benefit 
obligation at the end of the reporting period less the fair value of plan assets. The defined benefit obligation is calculated annually 
by independent actuaries using the projected unit credit method. The present value of the defined benefits obligation is determined 
by discounting the estimated future cash outflows using interest rates of high-quality corporate bonds that have terms to maturity 
approximating to the terms of the related pension obligations.

Actuarial gains and losses arising from experience adjustments and changes in actuarial assumptions are charged or credited within 
other comprehensive income in the period in which they arise.

Defined contribution plan
A defined contribution plan is a pension plan under which the Group pays fixed contributions to an independent entity. The Group 
has no legal or constructive obligations to pay further contributions after payment of the fixed contribution. Contributions recognised 
in respect of personal pension plans are expensed as they fall due. Liabilities and assets may be recognised if an underpayment or 
prepayment has occurred and are included in current liabilities or current assets as they are normally of a short-term nature.

Financial assets

The Group’s financial assets include cash, trade receivables and other receivables. The Company’s financial assets relate to amounts 
owed by subsidiary companies which are initially recorded at fair value and subsequently at amortised cost. 

All financial assets are initially recognised at fair value, plus refinancing costs. After initial recognition, these are measured at amortised 
cost using the effective interest method. Discounting is omitted where the effect of discounting is immaterial. The Group’s cash and cash 
equivalents, trade and most other receivables fall into this category of financial instruments.

The Group uses a receivables financing facility against certain customer trade receivables, and a number of separate customer 
financing arrangements. Under these arrangements the associated trade receivables are non-recourse to the Group and as such 
substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of these trade receivables are transferred at the point the trade receivables are 
transferred to third parties. Consequently, those trade receivables are derecognised at the point of transfer. 

92

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

3 Accounting policies continued
Financial assets continued 

The Group makes use of a simplified approach in accounting for trade and other receivables and records the loss allowance as lifetime 
expected credit losses. These are the expected shortfalls in contractual cash flows, considering the potential for default at any point 
during the life of the financial instrument. In calculating, the Group uses its historical experience, external indicators and forward-
looking information to calculate the expected credit losses using a provision matrix. The Group assesses impairment of trade receivables 
on a collective basis as they possess shared credit risk characteristics, and they have been grouped based on the days past due. Refer 
to note 29 for a detailed analysis of how the impairment requirements of IFRS 9 are applied.

The Company assesses at each balance sheet date whether amounts owed by subsidiary companies are impaired by reference to any 
evidence indicating that the Company may not be able to collect all amounts due in full.

Financial liabilities

The Group’s financial liabilities may include bank loans, receivables finance facilities, trade and other payables including liabilities 
for share-based payments, and other liabilities, which include deferred and contingent consideration payable in respect of 
business acquisitions.

Financial liabilities are recognised when the Group becomes a party to the contractual agreements of the instrument. All interest-related 
charges are recognised as an expense in “finance costs” in the statement of comprehensive income.

Bank funding is raised to support the working capital requirements of the Group’s operations. They are recognised at the proceeds 
received and any direct issue costs are carried forward and amortised over the term of the relevant borrowings. Any exit fee liabilities are 
recognised on the balance sheet at the time of refinancing. All other finance charges are charged to the profit and loss account on an 
accruals basis. Working capital funding is currently provided via a Receivables Finance Agreement and a number of separate Customer 
Financing arrangements. Details are provided in note 21. Cash flows in relation to the Customer Financing arrangements are recognised 
as operating cash flows. Cash flows arising from the Receivables Finance Agreement are included as a movement in financing cash flows.

Trade payables are recognised initially at their fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost less settlement payments.

Dividend distributions to shareholders are included in “other short-term financial liabilities” when the dividends are approved by the 
shareholders’ meeting prior to the financial year-end but remain unpaid at the year-end.

Derivative financial instruments and hedge accounting

The Group accounts for derivative financial instruments at fair value through profit and loss (“FVTPL”) except for derivatives designated 
as hedging instruments in cash flow hedge relationships, which require a specific accounting treatment. To qualify for hedge 
accounting, the hedging relationship must meet all of the following requirements:
• 
• 
• 

there is an economic relationship between the hedged item and the hedging instrument;
the effect of credit risk does not dominate the value changes that result from that economic relationship; and
the hedge ratio of the hedging relationship is the same as that resulting from the quantity of the hedged item that the entity actually 
hedges and the quantity of the hedging instrument that the entity actually uses to hedge that quantity of hedged item.

During the year, the Group has designated an interest rate cap contract as a hedged instrument in a cash flow hedge relationship.  
This arrangement has been entered into to mitigate interest rate risk arising from future increases in the SONIA interest rate. All derivative 
financial instruments used for hedge accounting are recognised initially at fair value and reported subsequently at fair value in the 
statement of financial position.

To the extent that the hedge is effective, changes in the fair value of derivatives designated as hedging instruments in cash flow 
hedges are recognised in other comprehensive income and included within the cash flow hedge reserve in equity. Any ineffectiveness 
in the hedge relationship is recognised immediately in profit or loss. At the time the hedged item affects profit or loss, any gain or loss 
previously recognised in other comprehensive income is reclassified from equity to profit or loss and presented as a reclassification 
adjustment within other comprehensive income. However, if a non-financial asset or liability is recognised as a result of the hedged 
transaction, the gains and losses previously recognised in other comprehensive income are included in the initial measurement of the 
hedged item.

If a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, any related gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is transferred 
immediately to profit or loss. If the hedging relationship ceases to meet the effectiveness conditions, hedge accounting is discontinued, 
and the related gain or loss is held in the equity reserve until the forecast transaction occurs.

Short-term employee benefits

Short-term employee benefits, including holiday entitlement, are current liabilities included in accruals, measured at the undiscounted 
amount that the Group expects to pay as a result of the unused entitlement.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

93

Provisions and contingent liabilities 

Provisions are recognised when present obligations will probably lead to an outflow of economic resources from the Group and they can 
be estimated reliably. The timing or amount of the outflow may still be uncertain. A present obligation arises from the presence of a legal 
or constructive commitment that has resulted from past events, for example, legal disputes or onerous contracts. 

Provisions are measured as the estimated expenditure required to settle the present obligation, based on the most reliable evidence 
available at the balance sheet date, including the risks and uncertainties associated with the present obligation. Where there are 
a number of similar obligations, the likelihood that an outflow will be required in settlement is determined by considering the class 
of obligations as a whole. In addition, long-term provisions are discounted to their present values, where the time value of money 
is material.

All provisions are reviewed at each balance sheet date and adjusted to reflect the current best estimate.

Contingent liabilities reflect those cases where the possible outflow of economic resource as a result of present obligations is considered 
improbable or remote, or the amount to be provided for cannot be measured reliably. No liability is recognised in the consolidated 
statement of financial position; instead, they are disclosed in note 26.

Equity

An equity instrument is any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting all of its liabilities.

Share capital is determined using the nominal value of shares that have been issued.

Own shares is determined using the nominal value of shares that were issued to the Employee Benefit Trust. This Trust is deemed to be 
controlled by the Group and therefore consolidated, resulting in the “Own shares” deducted from equity.

The share premium account represents premiums received on the initial issuing of the share capital. Any transaction costs associated 
with the issuing of shares are deducted from share premium, net of any related income tax benefits.

The share-based payment reserve represents the value of shares granted under share-based payment arrangements.

The profit and loss account includes all current and prior period results as disclosed in the statement of comprehensive income.

Dividends

Final dividends are recognised as a distribution in the period in which they are approved by the shareholders. Interim dividends 
are recorded in the period in which they are paid. Distributions to owners of the Company are not recognised in the statement of 
comprehensive income under IFRS but are disclosed as a component of the statement of changes in equity.

Share-based employee remuneration

All share-based payment arrangements are recognised in the Consolidated financial statements. The Group operates equity-settled  
and cash-settled share-based remuneration plans for remuneration of certain of its Directors and employees.

Equity-settled share-based remuneration
All employee services received in exchange for the grant of any share-based remuneration are measured at their fair values at the  
date of grant. These are indirectly determined by reference to the fair value of the share options awarded. Their value is appraised at  
the grant date and excludes the impact of any non-market vesting conditions (for example, profitability and sales growth targets).  
All share-based remuneration is ultimately recognised as an expense in profit or loss in the statement of comprehensive income with  
a corresponding credit to the share-based payment reserve, net of deferred tax where applicable.

If vesting periods or other vesting conditions apply, the expense is allocated over the vesting period, based on the best available estimate 
of the number of share options expected to vest. Non-market vesting conditions are included in assumptions about the number of 
options that are expected to become exercisable. Estimates are subsequently revised, if there is any indication that the number of share 
options expected to vest differs from previous estimates. No adjustment is made to the expense recognised in prior periods if fewer share 
options ultimately are exercised than originally estimated.

Upon exercise of share options, the proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs up to the nominal value of the 
shares issued are allocated to share capital with any excess being recorded as share premium.

Cash-settled share-based remuneration
The Group has in place certain issued cash-settled share-based payment schemes in respect of services provided by key employees. 
The share-based payment is measured at the fair value of the liability at the grant date and remeasured at fair value of the liability at 
each subsequent balance sheet date. A financial liability is recognised for the fair value of the share-based payments at the date of  
the grant and is remeasured at the end of each reporting period and at settlement with any changes to the fair value recognised in 
profit or loss in the statement of comprehensive income. The fair value of awards is recognised over the periods in which employees 
render service.

94

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

3 Accounting policies continued
Critical judgements and estimate uncertainty in applying the Group’s accounting policies
Significant management judgements
The following are the judgements made by management in applying the accounting policies of the Group that have the most significant 
effect on the financial statements. 

Revenue recognition
The Group assesses the nature of the commercial arrangements with its customers to determine whether it is acting as the principal or 
as an agent. When the Group acts as a principal, revenue is recognised as the full amount invoiced, net of value-added tax, rebates and 
discounts. When the Group provides a secondary service in which it acts as agent for the customer, typically in partnership with another 
employment agency, the amount of revenue recognised is limited to the margin receivable for that service after making provision for any 
losses foreseen, volume rebates and any other amounts payable, rather than the full amount invoiced.

In most cases the Group acts as principal due to its direct relationship with its customers and its primary relationship with the worker, 
with control over when and where they are placed, and pricing. Revenue is recognised on an agency basis when the Group does not 
have a direct relationship with the worker for control or remuneration and does not have primary responsibility for their placement.

Non-underlying items
The Group supplements the performance disclosures that are required under IFRS with additional measures and information that is 
intended to assist the understanding of exceptional income or charges, and to demonstrate the underlying results of the business. 

Non-underlying income or expenditure items are typically non-recurring items of a particular size and/or nature relating to the 
operations of the business that are judged to merit separate disclosure in the income statement. Additional explanation is given 
regarding the circumstances that gave rise to each item and its likely outcome, see note 5.

Borrowings
The Group has a new Receivable Financing Agreement (“RFA”), which commenced on 10 June 2021. The Group receives advances 
against eligible receivables but retains responsibility for collection. The amounts due are funded on a recourse basis and consequently 
the receivable remains on the balance sheet until settled by the customer.

The Group receives additional funding by using a number of separate Customer Financing arrangements. In these separate arrangements 
the associated trade receivables are considered to be settled on receipt of funds. Management consider the arrangements to be 
non-recourse to the Group and consequently debt is removed from the total receivables balance on the date of settlement. 

The effect of these receivables financing arrangements is that trade receivables are settled significantly in advance of normal 
commercial terms, which can be 60–90 days for these customers. The Group incurs a cost for this service, which is judged to be 
financing in nature rather than a settlement discount, or other form of price reduction, and it is therefore treated as a finance cost 
through profit and loss. Details of the Group’s borrowings are given in note 20.

Prior to its repayment in June 2021, the Group had in place a £20.0m Revolving Credit Facility (“RCF”), which would have expired in 
July 2022. In practice the elements of the facility that were drawn down typically had short-term expiry dates. Management considered 
the overall effect and features of the facility to be those of long-term borrowings that would expire after more than one year from the 
end of the year. The Group had an unconditional right to renew at each expiry date and roll the loan. Accordingly, the RCF balance 
outstanding was disclosed as non-current at 31 December 2020.

Deferred tax asset
The Group recognises a deferred tax asset on unused tax losses carried forward and on the timing difference between depreciation 
charges and tax allowances. The Group is profitable and management has determined that there is sufficient evidence to show that the 
tax losses will be utilised in the foreseeable future.

Details of all deferred tax balances are provided in note 24.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

95

Estimation uncertainty
Information about estimates and assumptions that may have the most significant effect on recognition and measurement of assets, 
liabilities, income and expenses is provided below. Actual results may be substantially different. 

Impairment of non-financial assets and goodwill
In assessing impairment, management estimates the recoverable amount of each asset or cash-generating unit based on expected 
future cash flows and uses an interest rate to discount them. Estimation uncertainty relates to assumptions about future operating 
results and the determination of a suitable discount rate.

In previous years, the Group has recognised impairment losses on goodwill in its Recruitment GB and PeoplePlus divisions (see note 11) 
and the Company has recognised impairment losses on its investments in certain subsidiary undertakings.

Trade and other receivables
Due to the nature of its contracts with the English Skills Funding Agency, the PeoplePlus division recognises some of its revenues on a 
completion basis using management’s best estimate of the likely outcome and the value of the service provided at the reporting date. 
At the year-end the value of accrued income subject to estimation was £1.1m (2020: £0.9m).

The Group’s credit control procedures are considered to be robust, but the potential for loss is always present. Management conducts 
regular detailed reviews of overdue and delinquent debt in order to estimate the value of bad debt provision required. If the expected 
credit loss allowances were to double, the increase in the provision would be £0.1m.

An analysis of trade and other receivables is given in note 17 and details of their risk profile is provided in note 29.

Holiday pay accrual
As required by International Accounting Standard 19 – Employee Benefits, the Group estimates the amount of holiday pay earned and 
unpaid at the year-end. The basic accrual is based on the number of hours earned by each worker multiplied by their average hourly 
pay rate calculated over the previous 52 weeks. Holiday pay hours accrue over the 12 months following each individual worker’s start 
date and any unclaimed hours outstanding on the anniversary date are lapsed. For this and other reasons, particularly absences 
without notice, the amount of holiday pay paid is always lower than the maximum liability – known as the “take-up” rate – and the 
accrual similarly is reduced. For accrual purposes, management bases the take-up rate on historic data averaged over the previous 
12 months. The take-up rate fluctuates with seasonality and the availability of work, depending upon customer requirements and, 
consequently, the accrual is considered to be a best estimate. For every percentage point change in the take-up rate, the provision 
would change by £0.1m (2020: £0.1m).

The holiday pay accrual, which amounts to £13.1m (2020: £14.4m), is included within accruals in note 20. 

96

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

4 Segment reporting – continuing operations
Management currently identifies three operating segments: Recruitment GB, the provision of workforce recruitment and management 
to industry; Recruitment Ireland, the provision of generalist recruitment services; and PeoplePlus, the provision of skills and employment 
training and support. The Group’s operating segments are determined based on the Group’s internal reporting to the Chief Operating 
Decision Maker (“CODM”). The CODM has been determined to be the Group Chief Executive, with support from the Board.

Whilst there are individual legal entities within the three operating segments, they are operated and reviewed as single units by the 
Board of Directors. Each legal entity within an operating segment has the same management team, head office and have similar 
economic characteristics. Historically and going forward, management will integrate new acquisitions into the main trading entities 
within each operating segment.

Segment information for the reporting year is as follows:

Recruitment 
GB 
2021
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland 
2021
£m

PeoplePlus 
2021
£m

Group 
Costs 
2021
£m

Total 
Group 
2021
£m

Recruitment 
GB
2020
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland
2020
£m

PeoplePlus
2020
£m

Group 
Costs
2020
£m

Total 
Group
2020
£m

Sales revenue from 
external customers
Cost of sales

747.9
(697.2)

111.7
(100.4)

Segment gross profit

50.7

11.3

83.1
(62.3)

20.8

–
–

–

942.7
(859.9)

732.1
(685.9)

82.8

46.2

120.5
(110.0)

10.5

75.0
(57.1)

17.9

–
–

–

927.6
(853.0)

74.6

Administrative 
expenses
Depreciation, software 
& lease amortisation

Segment underlying 
operating profit/
(loss)*

Reorganisation costs 
Transaction costs
Amortisation of 
intangibles arising on 
business combinations
Goodwill impairment
Share-based 
payment charge

Segment profit/(loss) 
from operations

Finance costs

Segment loss before 
taxation 

Tax credit

Segment (loss)/profit 
from continuing 
operations 

(40.4)

(8.4)

(14.0)

(3.4)

(66.2)

(38.2)

(8.2)

(13.4) 

(2.6)

(62.4)

(3.2)

(0.4)

(2.7)

–

(6.3)

(3.8)

(0.7)

(2.9)

–

(7.4)

7.1

–
–

(6.4)
–

–

0.7

(2.0)

(1.3)

0.3

2.5

–
–

(1.4)
–

–

1.1

(0.3)

0.8

(0.1)

4.1

–
–

(0.2)
–

–

3.9

–

3.9

–

–
–

–
–

–

(3.4)

(0.1)

(3.5)

1.5

(3.4)

10.3

4.2

(2.0)
–

1.6

(0.7)
–

1.6

–
–

–
–

(8.0)
–

(7.6)
(18.8)

(1.4)
–

(0.2)
(16.5)

–

–

–

(0.1)

2.3

(2.4)

(0.1)

1.7

(24.2)

(2.5)

(26.7)

0.6

(0.5)

(0.2)

(0.7)

0.2

(15.2)

(0.1)

(15.3)

0.7

(2.6)

(1.3)
(0.5)

–
–

–

(4.4)

(4.5)

(8.9)

1.6

4.8

(4.0)
(0.5)

(9.2)
(35.3)

(0.1)

(44.3)

(7.3)

(51.6)

3.1

(1.0)

0.7

3.9

(2.0)

1.6

(26.1)

(0.5)

(14.6)

(7.3)

(48.5)

* 

 Segment underlying profit before goodwill impairment, amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations, reorganisation costs and other non-underlying costs.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

97

Recruitment 
GB 
2021
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland 
2021
£m

PeoplePlus 
2021
£m

Staffline 
 Group 
2021
£m

Total 
Group 
2021
£m

Recruitment 
GB
2020
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland
2020
£m

PeoplePlus
2020 
Restated
£m

Staffline  
Group
2020
£m

Total Group
2020 
Restated
£m

36.0
106.6

11.6
20.1

36.5
19.9

–
0.5

84.1
147.1

44.5
97.9

11.9
15.6

37.1
18.4

142.6

31.7

56.4

0.5

231.2

142.4

27.5

55.5

–
–

–

93.5
131.9

225.4

128.0

13.2

26.3

0.1

167.6

142.3

22.4

24.2

20.6

209.5

2.8

–

1.7

–

4.5

1.2

0.1

1.3

–

2.6

Total non-current 
assets
Total current assets 

Total assets 
(consolidated)

Total liabilities 
(consolidated)

Cash capital 
expenditure inc 
software

Prior year results have been restated to exclude deferred tax assets as required by IFRS 8 Operating segments. 

Revenues can be analysed by country as follows (97% of revenues arising within the UK in 2021, 97% in 2020):

UK
Republic of Ireland

Recruitment 
GB 
2021
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland 
2021
£m

747.9
–

747.9

83.9
27.8

111.7

PeoplePlus 
2021
£m

83.1
–

83.1

Total 
Group 
2021
£m

914.9
27.8

942.7

Recruitment 
GB 
2020
£m

Recruitment 
Ireland
2020
£m

732.1
–

732.1

91.4
29.1

120.5

PeoplePlus
2020
£m

Total Group 
2020
£m

75.0 
–

75.0

898.5 
29.1

927.6

No customer contributed more than 10% of the Group’s revenue during either 2021 or 2020. 

5 Expenses by nature
Expenses by nature are as follows:

Underlying expenses

Employee benefits expenses – cost of sales
Other cost of sales
Employee benefits expenses – administrative expenses
Depreciation and software amortisation
Operating lease expenses
Other administrative expenses

Disclosed as:
Cost of sales
Administrative expenses – excluding non-underlying expenses

2021 
£m

834.1
25.7
46.1
6.3
1.5
18.7

932.4

859.9
72.5

932.4

2020
£m

827.9
25.1
40.5
7.4
1.5
20.4

922.8

853.0
69.8

922.8

98

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

5 Expenses by nature continued
Auditor’s remuneration

Fees payable to the Company’s auditor for the audit of the Company’s annual accounts
Fees payable to the Company’s auditor and its associates for other services:
– Audit of the accounts of subsidiaries
– Audit of the pension scheme
– Audit-related assurance services

Total

Non-underlying expenses – continuing operations

Reorganisation, rationalisation and restructuring costs 
Transaction costs – business acquisitions and strategic options
Amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations (licences, customer contracts)
Goodwill impairment
Share-based payment charges – other senior executives

Note

1
2
3
4

Tax credit on above non-underlying expenses

Post taxation effect on above non-underlying expenses

Notes:

2021 
£’000

15

620
16
15

666

2021 
£m

–
–
8.0
–
–

8.0

(0.9)

7.1

2020 
£’000

15

680
18
154

867

2020
£m

4.0
0.5
9.2
35.3
0.1

49.1

(0.4)

48.7

1.   In 2020 the Group continued its reorganisation, rationalisation and restructuring programme across all the divisions in order to reduce the number of properties occupied 

and to reduce administration headcount.

2.   Costs were incurred in 2020 in relation to advice on the Group’s strategic options.

3.   The charge for amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations relates principally to the acquisitions of the Endeavour Group, Passionate About People, 

Grafton Recruitment, Milestone and Brightwork.

4.   The results of the impairment review for reporting the 2020 results showed that impairment charges to goodwill were required in the Recruitment GB and PeoplePlus cash-

generating units of £18.8m and £16.5m respectively.

6 Finance costs

Interest payable on financing arrangements
Refinancing costs – non-underlying

Total

7 Directors’ and employees’ remuneration
Employee benefits expense – consolidated

Expense recognised for employee (excluding temporary workers) benefits is analysed below:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Other pension costs – defined contribution plans

Share-based payment charge – equity-settled

Included in administrative expenses (note 5)
Included in cost of sales
Share-based payment charge – equity-settled

2021 
£m

2.4
–

2.4

2021 
£m

72.3
6.7
3.1

82.1
0.1

82.2

40.8
41.3
0.1

82.2

2020 
£m

4.1
3.2

7.3

2020
£m

64.8
6.7
3.5

75.0
0.1

75.1

40.8
34.2
0.1

75.1

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

99

The average monthly number of persons (including Directors) employed by the Group during the year was:
– Sales and administrative

2021
Number

2020
Number

2,336

2,357

Included in cost of sales are temporary workers’ remuneration paid through the temporary payroll of subsidiary companies as follows:

Wages and salaries payable to employees
Social security costs
Other pension costs – defined contribution plans
Gross cost
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme receipts

The average monthly number of temporary workers contracted by the Group during the year was:

2021 
£m

737.6
49.4
7.4
794.4
(1.6)

792.8

2020
£m

758.2
 44.8 
 4.4 
807.4
(31.4)

776.0

Number

37,844

Number

43,163

The average number of persons (including Directors) employed by the Company during the year was six (2020: four). All Directors of the  
Group are remunerated through a subsidiary of the Company for their services to the Group as a whole and no direct recharge was 
made to the Company during the year (2020: £nil). 

Directors’ remuneration is detailed on pages 56 to 59 of the Report on Remuneration and disclosed further in note 26. 

Share-based employee remuneration
Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share option plan 2017
The options granted over 148,276 Ordinary Shares under this scheme had a contract start date of 1 December 2017 and were exercisable 
between 1 December 2020 and 31 May 2021. No options were exercised under the scheme.

Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share option plan 2018
In September 2018, Staffline granted options to employees as part of its Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share scheme for 2018. Eligible 
employees were invited to subscribe for options over Staffline’s Ordinary Shares of 10p each (“Ordinary Shares”) with an exercise price 
of £9.76, a 20% discount to the closing middle market price on the trading day before the invitation to participate was made. The options 
have a contract start date of 1 December 2018 and are exercisable between 1 December 2021 and 31 May 2022. A total of 167 employees 
elected to participate and, pursuant to these elections, a total of 73,588 options over Ordinary Shares were granted on 18 September 
2018, equating to 0.11% of the current issued share capital of 68,930,486 shares. As at 31 December 2021, options over 2,323 shares 
remain (33 employees), options over 71,265 shares having lapsed (164 employees).

Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share option plan 2019
In November 2019, Staffline granted options to employees as part of its Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share scheme for 2019. Eligible 
employees were invited to subscribe for options over Staffline’s Ordinary Shares of 10p each (“Ordinary Shares”) with an exercise price 
of 76p, a 20% discount to the closing middle market price on the trading day before the invitation to participate was made. The options 
have a contract start date of 1 December 2019 and are exercisable between 1 December 2022 and 1 June 2023. A total of 170 employees 
elected to participate and, pursuant to these elections, a total of 1,336,094 options over Ordinary Shares were granted on 6 November 
2019, equating to 1.94% of the current issued share capital of 68,930,486 shares. As at 31 December 2021, options over 393,243 shares 
remain (52 employees), options over 942,851 shares having lapsed (118 employees).

Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share option plan 2021
In October 2021, Staffline Group plc granted options to employees as part of its Save As You Earn (“SAYE”) share scheme for 2021. Eligible 
employees across the Group were invited to subscribe for options over Staffline’s ordinary shares of 10p each (“Ordinary Shares”) with an 
exercise price of 50.56p, a 20% discount to the closing middle market price of 63.20p on the trading day before the invitation to participate 
was made on 8 October 2021. The options have a contract start date of 1 December 2021 and are exercisable between 1 December 2024 
and 31 May 2025. A total of 272 employees elected to participate and, pursuant to these elections, a total of 2,430,723 options over 
Ordinary Shares were granted on 29 October 2021, equating to 1.466% of the current issued share capital of 165,767,728 shares. As at 
31 December 2021, options over 2,269,097 shares remain (256 employees), options over 161,626 shares having lapsed (16 employees).

100

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

7 Directors’ and employees’ remuneration continued
Options awarded to Directors under this scheme are set out in the table below:

Albert Ellis – Chief Executive Officer
Daniel Quint – Chief Financial Officer

Joint Share Ownership Plan 2018

Options granted

35,601
35,601

In January 2018, the Company established a Joint Share Ownership Plan (“JSOP”) to provide additional incentives to certain senior 
executives. The JSOP shares are held jointly between the Directors and the Staffline Group plc Employee Benefit Trust. Under the 
terms of the JSOP rules, the Directors are eligible to receive the excess of any disposal proceeds received for the JSOP shares over the 
participation price. The JSOP shares do not carry dividend or voting rights whilst they are jointly held by the executives and the Staffline 
Group plc Employee Benefit Trust.

A Plan covering the five-year period ending 31 December 2022 was approved by the Remuneration Committee in October 2017. 
The amount receivable by the executives is calculated based on certain business performance conditions, as follows:
1. 

 A range of underlying diluted earnings per share (“EPS”) of between 180.0p and 200.0p required in the financial year 2022 
(maximum 50% of the award). No shares vest if the EPS is below 180.0p in that year.
 50% of the award is subject to an additional condition that total shareholder return exceeds the increase in the FTSE AIM All-Share 
Total Return Index (“AXX”) over the period 1 January 2018 to 30 June 2023 (nil award if the minimum EPS requirement above is  
not achieved). The Company’s share price at 1 January 2018 was 1,040p and the AXX stood at 1,050p. As at 31 December 2018,  
the Company’s share price had increased by 19% to 1,240p whereas the AXX had fallen by 18% to 859p.

2. 

During the year it was determined that there was no prospect that the above conditions would be met and that no shares would be 
awarded under the Plan. Accordingly, the Plan was wound up during the year.

2021 Long-Term Incentive Plan

During the year the Remuneration Committee approved the creation of a new Long-Term Incentive Plan and on 6 July 2021 the Board 
approved the award of and granted nil cost options (the “Options”) over 1,678,279 ordinary shares of ten pence each in the Company 
(“Ordinary Shares”) to certain employees, including persons discharging managerial responsibilities (“PDMRs”).

The vesting of the Options is subject to the satisfaction of the Company achieving certain financial performance criteria for the financial 
year ending 31 December 2023. 50% of the Options awarded are subject to achieving earnings per share hurdles and 50% are subject 
to achieving EBITDA hurdles. In addition, no Options will vest unless the average closing price of the Ordinary Shares for the last 30 
business days of 2023 is above a minimum target. The Options will vest from 30 June 2024 and will be exercisable until 30 June 2031.

The Options awarded to PDMRs are set out in the table below:

Albert Ellis – Chief Executive Officer
Daniel Quint – Chief Financial Officer
Other senior executives

Options granted

573,770
450,820
653,689

1,678,279

Subsequent to the award, one of the executives resigned as an employee of the Group and accordingly options over 180,328 lapsed. 

Share-based employee remuneration 

In total, a charge of £0.1m of employee remuneration expense has been included in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income 
for the year ended 31 December 2021 (2020: £0.1m) which increased the share-based payment reserve by £0.1m (2020: £0.1m) in respect of 
equity-settled schemes (all employees SAYE scheme) and increased the liability by £nil (2020: £1.0m) in respect of cash-settled JSOP schemes. 

Save As You Earn Scheme (equity-settled)

Total

Key management personnel

2021
£m

0.1

0.1

2020 
£m

0.1

0.1

The key management personnel are considered to be the Board of Directors of Staffline Group plc, whose remuneration can be seen 
in the Report on Remuneration on pages 56 to 59, and the divisional Directors. The aggregate remuneration, excluding share-based 
payment charges, for the divisional Directors for the year is £2.1m (2020: £1.6m). In the year ended 31 December 2020, compensation 
payments of £0.2m were made on the departure of four key management personnel. Disclosures in accordance with IAS 24 are included 
in note 26.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

101

8 Tax expense
The tax credit on the loss for the year consists of:

Continuing activities

Corporation tax
UK corporation tax at 19.00% (2020: 19.00%)
Adjustments in respect of prior years

UK current tax (credit)/charge

Deferred tax 
Timing differences arising in the year
Adjustments in respect of prior years

UK deferred tax credit

Total UK tax credit for the year

The tax credit can be further analysed by division and by underlying/non-underlying trading as follows:

Recruitment GB
Recruitment Ireland
PeoplePlus
Staffline Group

Total UK tax credit for the year

Underlying trading
Non-underlying trading

Total UK tax credit for the year

2021
 £m

–
(0.5)

(0.5)

(0.6)
(0.6)

(1.2)

(1.7)

2021 
£m

(0.1)
(0.1)
–
(1.5)

(1.7)

(0.8)
(0.9)

(1.7)

2020
£m

0.8
–

0.8

(3.3)
(0.6)

(3.9)

(3.1)

2020
£m

(0.6)
(0.2)
(0.7)
(1.6)

(3.1)

(0.4)
(2.7)

(3.1)

The tax credit for the year, as recognised in the statement of comprehensive income, is lower than the standard rate of corporation tax in 
the UK of 19.00% (2020: lower than the 19.00% standard rate). The differences are explained below:

Loss for the year before taxation
Tax rate

Tax on loss for the year at the standard rate

Effect of:
Goodwill impairment
Change in deferred tax rate to 25%
Expenses not allowable
Income not taxable
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Tax losses available
Deferred tax not recognised

Actual tax credit

On underlying profit
On non-underlying loss

Actual tax credit

2021 
£m
Total

(0.1)
19%

–

–
(0.7)
–
(0.1)
(1.1)
(0.8)
1.0

(1.7)

(0.8)
(0.9)

(1.7)

2020
£m
Total

(51.6)
19%

(9.8)

6.7
0.5
0.9
–
(0.6)
(0.8)
–

(3.1)

(2.7)
(0.4)

(3.1)

The total tax credit for the year of £1.7m (2020: £3.1m) comprises a corporation tax credit relating to prior years and the movement 
of deferred tax balances. The Group has no current corporation tax liability in respect of either the current or prior years and is 
anticipating a refund relating to tax losses carried back to a prior period. Corporation tax losses of £16.7m carried forward in all divisions 
and the Company have been recognised as a deferred tax asset. Additional tax losses, amounting to £6.6m (2020: £7.3m) whose short-
term recoverability is less certain have not been recognised as a deferred tax asset. An amount of overpaid corporation tax of £4.1m was 
offset against the balance of VAT that was deferred between March and June 2020. Further corporation tax amounts receivable of £1.7m 
were received during the year.

102

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

8 Tax expense continued
The impairment of goodwill in 2020 is not deductible under UK corporation tax and is therefore added back to taxable profits. A deferred 
tax liability is recognised in respect of intangible assets arising on acquired businesses. This liability is reduced each year in line with the 
amortisation charge, giving rise to a deferred tax credit each year.

An increase in the UK corporation tax rate from 19% to 25% (effective 1 April 2023) was substantially enacted on 24 May 2021. This will 
increase the Company’s future tax charges accordingly. The deferred tax asset has therefore been calculated at a rate of 25%.

No material tax charges arise on overseas profits or losses and accordingly no disclosures relating to overseas tax are included within the 
financial statements.

The current tax asset at the end of 2021 of £0.6m (2020: £1.7m) can be analysed as follows:

(Asset)/liability at the beginning of the year
(Credit)/charge on profits for the year
Loss carried back to prior years
R&D tax credit
Offset against deferred VAT liability
Received/(paid) in the year (net of repayments)

Asset at the end of the year

Balance of 2021 tax year (assets)
Balance of 2020 tax year (assets)
Balance of 2017 tax year (assets)

Asset at the end of the year

2021 
£m

(1.7)
–
(0.4)
(0.2)
–
1.7

(0.6)

–
(0.6)
–

(0.6)

2020
£m

(5.3)
–

0.2
4.1
(0.7)

(1.7)

(0.7)
(0.7)
(1.0)

(1.7)

9 Earnings per share and dividends
The calculation of basic earnings per share is based on the earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders divided by the weighted 
average number of shares in issue during the year, after deducting any shares held in the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust – “own 
shares” (2020: 1,140,400 shares). The calculation of the diluted earnings per share is based on the basic earnings per share as adjusted 
to further take into account the potential issue of Ordinary Shares resulting from share options granted to certain Directors and share 
options granted to employees under the SAYE and long-term incentive schemes. 

Details of the earnings and weighted average number of shares used in the calculations are set out below:

Profit/(loss) from continuing operations (£m)
Weighted average number of shares
Earnings/(loss) per share from continuing operations (p)

Basic
2021

Basic
2020

Diluted
2021

Diluted
2020

1.6
122,178,126
1.3p

(48.5)
67,790,086
(71.5)p

1.6
122,682,511
1.3p

(48.5)
67,790,086
(71.5)p

Underlying earnings (post tax) from continuing operations (£m)
Underlying earnings per share (p)* 

8.7
7.1p

3.4
5.0p

8.7
7.1p

3.4
5.0p

Loss from discontinued operations (£m)
Weighted average number of shares
Loss per share from discontinued operations (p)

Underlying loss from discontinued operations (£m)
Underlying loss per share from discontinued operations (p)* 

Profit/(loss) for the year (£m)
Weighted average number of shares 
Total earnings/(loss)per share (p)

(0.4)
122,178,126
(0.3)p

(4.2)
67,790,086
(6.2)p

(0.4)
122,682,511
(0.3)p

(4.2)
67,790,086
(6.2)p

–
–

(1.9)
(2.8)p

–
–

(1.9)
(2.8)p

1.2
122,178,126
1.0p

(52.7)
67,790,086
(77.7)p

1.2
122,682,511
1.0p

(52.7)
67,790,086
(77.7)p

* 

 Underlying earnings before goodwill impairment, amortisation of intangible assets arising on business combinations, reorganisation costs and other non-underlying costs.

The weighted average number of shares was increased by 54,388,040 shares to take account of the effect of the Placing, Subscription 
and Open Offer in June 2021 whereby 96,837,242 new Ordinary Shares were issued. The total number of dilutive share options held in 
LTIP and SAYE schemes is 504,384 (2020: Nil).

Dividends

The Board is not proposing a final dividend payment for 2021.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

103

10 Discontinued activities
On 1 December 2020, the Group sold its loss-making Apprenticeships training business for a nominal sum. The sale agreement required 
PeoplePlus to provide working capital support to the purchaser in the form of reimbursement of relevant salary costs incurred between 
December 2020 and March 2021, which are being repaid over 12 months commencing May 2021. In 2020, the Apprenticeships business 
recorded an underlying operating loss of £(2.2)m for the year, before reorganisation and exit costs of £(2.5)m. During 2021, further exit 
costs of £0.3m were incurred.

The Group completed its disposal of its subsidiaries in Poland to the incumbent management team in December 2021. The results of 
the Polish activities were deemed to be discontinued during 2020 and the loss for that year was £(0.3)m. Costs incurred during 2021, 
principally for legal fees, amounted to £0.1m.

11 Goodwill
Gross carrying amount by operating segment:

Gross carrying amount

At 1 January 2021 and 31 December 2021

Impairment adjustment

At 1 January 2021 and 31 December 2021

Net book amount at 31 December 2021

Net book amount at 31 December 2020

Impairment – Goodwill

Recruitment  

Recruitment  

GB
£m

54.5

33.1

21.4

21.4

Ireland
£m

5.7

PeoplePlus
£m

57.0

–

5.7

5.7

24.5

32.5

32.5

Total
£m

117.2

57.6

59.6

59.6

Management considers there to be three cash-generating units (“CGUs”), being Recruitment GB, Recruitment Ireland and PeoplePlus, 
in line with the operating segments defined in note 4. These three cash-generating units have been tested for impairment. 

An impairment review was conducted as at 31 December 2021. The recoverable amount of goodwill was determined based on a value-
in-use calculation, using forecasts for 2022-24, followed by an extrapolation of expected cash flows over the next two years with a long-
term growth rate of 0% for each cash-generating unit. The forecasts are prepared by the individual operating segments of the Group, 
which are considered to be the same as the determined CGU’s. The cash flow forecasts are based on current levels of trading for each 
CGU, with income and cost increases generally in line with inflation at 2% and no significant contract wins or losses.

Pre-tax discount rates of 14.4% for Recruitment GB, 12.0% for Recruitment Ireland and 11.7% for PeoplePlus (2020: 13.0% for Recruitment 
GB, 12.0% for Recruitment Ireland and 10.8% for PeoplePlus) were used based on the weighted average costs of capital for each 
operating segment. The recoverable amounts of the CGUs, having considered the higher of value-in-use and fair value less costs to sell, 
were £59.1m for Recruitment GB, £22.7m for Recruitment Ireland and £68.6m for PeoplePlus, all being value-in-use. The discount rates 
used are based on appropriate, current long-term market rate indicators to give a long-term forward view, whilst also acknowledging 
historical information. 

The results of the impairment review showed headroom in all cash-generating units and accordingly no impairment was noted. The same 
calculations indicated that no impairment was required to the Company’s carrying value of its investments. 

In making the assessment of the recoverability of assets within each CGU a number of judgements and assumptions were required. 

The critical judgement relates to the determination of the CGUs. Whilst there are individual legal entities within the three operating 
segments, they are operated and reviewed as single units by the Board of Directors. Each operating segment has its own management 
team and head office. The Group’s strategy, historically and going forward, has been to integrate new acquisitions into the main trading 
entities within each operating segment.

104

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

11 Goodwill continued
The key estimates in determining the value of each CGU are:

1.   The discount rate. In the calculations we have utilised a pre-tax discount rate of 14.4% for Recruitment GB, 12.0% for Recruitment 
Ireland and 11.7% for PeoplePlus and a terminal growth value of 0%. These rates are based on the latest weighted average costs  
of capital for each operating segment. These rates have increased this year primarily due to a movement in the risk-free rate.  
The calculations highlighted headroom of £21.3m for Recruitment GB, headroom of £11.2m for Recruitment Ireland and headroom  
of £36.2m for PeoplePlus. A 1% increase in the discount rates reduces the headroom to £17.3m for Recruitment GB, reduces  
headroom to £9.4m for Recruitment Ireland and reduces headroom to £29.6m for PeoplePlus. 

2. 

 The achievability of the forecasted future cash flows. There is an inherent uncertainty regarding the achievability of forecasts, as 
there are macro-economic factors outside of the Group’s control. A sustained underperformance of 10% reduces the headroom to 
£15.4m for Recruitment GB, reduces headroom to £8.9m for Recruitment Ireland and reduces headroom to £28.3m for PeoplePlus. 
A sustained underperformance of 37% would be required before any impairment was necessary to the goodwill. 

As at 31 December 2021, the Company had no goodwill (2020: £nil).

12 Other intangible assets
The Group’s other intangible assets include the customer contracts, brands and lists obtained through the acquisition of businesses plus 
acquired software. There are no intangible assets with restricted title. 

Gross carrying amount

At 1 January 2020
Additions 
Disposals

At 31 December 2020
Additions 
Disposals

At 31 December 2021

Amortisation

At 1 January 2020
Charged in the year
Disposals

At 31 December 2020
Charged in the year
Disposals

At 31 December 2021

Net book amount at 31 December 2021

Net book amount at 31 December 2020

The Company has no other intangible assets (2020: £nil).

Software
£m

Licences
£m

Customer  
contracts  

and brands
£m

Customer lists
£m

16.1
1.5
(5.4)

12.2
2.1
(0.8)

13.5

9.9
1.8
(5.2)

6.5
1.8
(0.7)

7.6

5.9

5.7

2.0
–
–

2.0
–
–

2.0

2.0
–
–

2.0
–
–

2.0

–

–

85.1
–
–

85.1
–
–

85.1

57.3
9.2
–

66.5
8.0
–

74.5

10.6

18.6

5.5
–
–

5.5
–
–

5.5

5.5
–
–

5.5
–
–

5.5

–

–

Total
£m

108.7
1.5
(5.4)

104.8
2.1
(0.8)

106.1

74.7
11.0
(5.2)

80.5
9.8
(0.7)

89.6

16.5

24.3

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

105

As at 31 December 2021, there are six individually material other intangible assets:

2021 £m

Customer  
contracts  
and brands

Software

2020 £m

Customer  
contracts  

Software

and brands

Customer contracts in Endeavour Group
Customer contracts/brands in Passionate About  
People Group
Customer contracts in Grafton Recruitment
Payroll and Credit Control software developed for 
Recruitment division
Customer contracts in One Call Recruitment
Customer contracts in Brightwork
Others

Net book amount at 31 December 2021

–

–
–

5.1
–
–
0.9

6.0

3.4

4.0
2.1

–
0.9
0.2
–

Total

3.4

4.0
2.1

5.1
0.9
0.2
0.8

5.8

6.2
3.4

–
1.5
0.9
0.8

Total

5.8

6.2
3.4

4.9
1.5
0.9
1.6

–

–
–

4.9
–
–
0.8

5.7

10.6

16.5

18.6

24.3

Software, customer contracts and brands each have a useful economic life (“UEL”) of 5.0 years. At 31 December 2021, the remaining 
UELs of the principal customer contracts are as follows:

Endeavour Group
Passionate About People Group
Grafton Recruitment
One Call Recruitment
Brightwork

13 Fixed asset investments – Company

Cost at 1 January 2020

Impairment adjustment

Net book amount at 31 December 2020

Impairment adjustment

Net book amount at 31 December 2021

UEL 
(years)

1.2
1.8
1.6
1.4
0.3

Investment
 in Group 
undertakings
 £m

75.0

(7.2)

67.8

–

67.8

An impairment review was carried out with respect to the Company’s carrying value of its investments in subsidiaries and considering 
recoverable amount as the higher of value-in-use and fair value less costs to sell for each investment.

The impairment review indicated that no impairment was required to the Company’s carrying value of its investments.

The recoverable amount of the investments was based on value-in-use calculations with the same assumptions as described in note 11. 

The recoverable amounts of the remaining investments were based on fair value less costs to sell with reference to level 3 inputs, being 
inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data, with consideration of the balance sheet position of the 
subsidiaries. No impairment adjustment is required. 

106

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

13 Fixed asset investments – Company continued
As at 31 December 2021, the Company holds interests in the following companies: 

Subsidiaries

Registered office: 19-20 The Triangle, NG2 Business Park, 
Nottingham, England, NG2 1AE

Staffline Recruitment Limited 
PeoplePlus Group Limited
A4e Limited 
A4e Enterprise Limited*
Agency Plus Limited* 
A La Carte Recruitment Limited*
Broomco (4198) Limited* 
Datum RPO Limited*
Driving Plus Limited*
Endeavour Group Limited*
Eos Works Limited* 
Eos Services Limited* 
Eos Works Group Limited 
Experience Management Limited 
Staffline Recruitment (NI) Limited (was Grafton Recruitment Limited)*
International Employment Group Limited 
Learning Plus System Limited 
Network Projects Limited* 
Omega Resource Group Limited*
One Call Recruitment Limited*
Passionate About People Limited*
Softmist Limited* 
IEG Limited 
Staffline Appointments Limited* 
Staffline Holdings Limited
Vital Recruitment Limited*

Registered office: Cooldriona Court, Main Street, Swords,  
Co. Dublin, Ireland, K67 WN92

Proportion of 
ordinary share 
capital held

Country of 
incorporation

Nature of business 

100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales 
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales 
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales 
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales
100%
Northern Ireland
100% England and Wales 
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales 
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales 
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales
100% England and Wales

Recruitment
Skills and training
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Recruitment
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Recruitment
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant 
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant
Dormant

Staffline Limited (was Staffline Recruitment Limited)
Staffline Recruitment (ROI) Limited (was Grafton Recruitment Limited)*

100% Republic of Ireland
100% Republic of Ireland

Dormant
Recruitment

Registered office: The Boat, 49 Queens Square, Belfast, BT1 3FG

PeoplePlus (Works) NI Limited* 

100%

Northern Ireland

Training

Registered office: 193/199 Bath Street, Glasgow, Scotland, G2 4HU

Brightwork Limited*
Brightwork Specialist Recruitment Limited*

100%
64%

Scotland
Scotland

Recruitment
Dormant

Registered office: Elgar House, Shrub Hill Road, Worcester, England, WR4 9EE

Warwickshire and West Mercia Community Rehabilitation Company Limited* 
Mercia Community Action CIC* 

100% England and Wales Probationary services
Dormant
100% England and Wales

Registered office: Southern Exchange House, 34 Earl Grey Street, 
Edinburgh, Scotland, EH3 9BN

PeoplePlus Scotland Limited*

100%

Scotland

Dormant

Registered office: Rua S. Joao de Brito 605 E-4, Porto, Ramalde,  
4100 455 Porto, Portugal

Omega Recruitment, Unipessoal LDA*

100%

Portugal

Recruitment

*  These companies are owned indirectly through other Group companies.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

107

14 Property, plant and equipment

Gross carrying amount

At 1 January 2020
Additions
Disposals

At 31 December 2020

Additions
Disposals

At 31 December 2021

Depreciation
At 1 January 2020
Charged in the year – operating
Disposals

At 31 December 2020

Charged in the year – operating
Charged in the year – impairment
Disposals

At 31 December 2021

Net book value

At 31 December 2021

At 31 December 2020

Land and 
buildings
£m

Computer 
equipment
£m

Fixtures  

and fittings
£m

Motor 
vehicles
£m

15.6
0.3
(1.2)

14.7

1.4
(1.4)

14.7

6.0
2.8
(0.9)

7.9

1.7
0.7
(0.7)

9.6

5.1

6.8

13.0
1.2
(2.9)

11.3

1.8
(0.8)

12.3

8.1
2.7
(2.2)

8.6

1.8
–
(0.7)

9.7

2.6

2.7

2.3
0.1
(1.1)

1.3

0.3
(0.4)

1.2

2.2
0.1
(1.1)

1.2

0.2
–
(0.3)

1.1

0.1

0.1

0.2
–
–

0.2

0.3
–

0.5

0.2
–
–

0.2

0.1
–
–

0.3

0.2

–

Total
£m

31.1
1.6
(5.2)

27.5

3.8
(2.6)

28.7

16.5
5.6
(4.2)

17.9

3.8
0.7
(1.7)

20.7

8.0

9.6

Land and buildings and computer equipment includes the following right-of-use assets:

At 31 December 2021

Office buildings
Computer equipment

At 31 December 2020

Office buildings
Computer equipment

As at 31 December 2021, the Company had no property, plant and equipment assets (2020: £nil).

Carrying 
amount

Depreciation 
expense

Impairment 

3.6
0.2

3.8

(1.6)
–

(1.6)

(0.7)
–

(0.7)

Carrying 
amount

Depreciation 
expense

Impairment 

5.0
0.2

5.2

(2.6)
(0.1)

(2.7)

–
–

–

108

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

15 Leases
Lease liabilities are presented in the statement of financial position as follows:

Current 
Non-current

2021
 £m

1.3
3.3

4.6

2020 
£m

1.6
3.9

5.5

The Group has leases for its operational and administrative offices, and some computer equipment. With the exception of short-term 
leases and leases of low-value underlying assets, each lease is reflected on the balance sheet as a right-of-use asset and a lease 
liability. The Group classifies its right-of-use assets in a consistent manner to its property, plant and equipment (see note 14).

Unless there is a contractual right for the Group to sublet the asset to another party, the right-of-use asset can typically only be used 
by the Group. Leases are either non-cancellable or may only be cancelled by incurring a substantive termination fee. Some leases 
contain an option to extend the lease for a further term. The Group is prohibited from selling or pledging the underlying leased assets as 
security. For leases over office buildings the Group must keep those properties in a good state of repair and return the properties in their 
original condition at the end of the lease. Further, the Group must insure items of property, plant and equipment and incur maintenance 
costs on such items in accordance with the lease contracts. 

The table below describes the nature of the Group’s leasing activities by type of right-of-use asset recognised on the balance sheet:

Right-of-use asset

Office building
IT equipment

No of right-
of-use assets 
leased

Range of 
remaining term 
(years)

Average 
remaining lease 
term 

No of leases 
with extension 
options

53
–

0.2 – 13.2
–

3.2
–

–
–

The lease liabilities are secured by the related underlying assets. Future minimum lease payments at 31 December 2021 were as follows:

31 December 2021
Lease payments
Finance charges

Net present value

31 December 2020
Lease payments
Finance charges

Net present value

Within one year

1-2 years

2-3 years 

3-4 years

After 5 years

Total

Minimum lease payments due

1.4
(0.1)

1.3

1.7
(0.1)

1.6

1.2
(0.1)

1.1

1.1
(0.1)

1.0

0.8
–

0.8

0.8
(0.1)

0.7

0.5
–

0.5

0.6
–

0.6

0.9
–

0.9

1.7
(0.1)

1.6

4.8
(0.2)

4.6

5.9
(0.4)

5.5

Lease payments not recognised as a liability

The Group has elected not to recognise a lease liability for short-term leases (leases with an expected term of 12 months or less) or for 
leases of low-value assets. Payments made under such leases are expensed on a straight-line basis. In addition, certain variable lease 
payments are not permitted to be recognised as lease liabilities and are expensed as incurred.

The expense relating to payments not included in the measurement of the lease liability is as follows:

Short-term leases
Leases of low-value assets

The Group had not committed to any leases that had not yet commenced.

Total cash outflow for leases for the year ended 31 December 2021 was £3.2m (2020: £4.8m).

2021
 £m

0.8
0.7

1.5

2020
 £m

0.6
0.8

1.4

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

109

16 Retirement benefit net liability
One of the Group’s subsidiaries, PeoplePlus Group Limited, operates a defined benefit pension scheme for some staff. The scheme is 
closed to new entrants. The last actuarial valuation of the scheme was at 30 May 2019. Given that the fair value of plan assets is only 
£10.1m (2020: £9.8m), only significant disclosures are reported below. 

The amounts recognised in the balance sheet are determined as follows:

Fair value of plan assets
Present value of funded obligations

Net liability in the balance sheet at 31 December 

Actuarial gain/(losses) during the year, before tax
Deferred tax on gain/(loss)

Actuarial gain/(loss) during the year, post deferred tax impact

2021
 £m

10.1
(10.4)

(0.3)

0.8
(0.1)

0.7

2020 
£m

9.8
(10.9)

(1.1)

(1.0)
0.2

(0.8)

The Directors have agreed with the pension trustees to make additional contributions to the pension scheme with a view to substantially 
reducing the liability by 31 July 2029. 

The movement in the fair value of the plan assets over the year is as follows:

Balance at 1 January 
Interest on assets
Expenses
Contributions – employer and member
Benefits paid
Actuarial gain/(loss) on asset return

Fair value of plan assets in the balance sheet at 31 December

At 31 December 2021, the scheme’s assets, valued at market value, were distributed as follows:

Bonds (68% of assets as at 31 December 2021)
Equities (31% of assets as at 31 December 2021)
Cash (1% of assets as at 31 December 2021)

Fair value of plan assets in the balance sheet at 31 December 2021

2021 
£m

9.8
0.1
(0.1)
0.2
(0.2)
0.3

10.1

2021
£m

5.7
3.3
1.1

10.1

2020 
£m

9.8
0.2
–
0.1
(0.2)
(0.1)

9.8

2020
£m

6.7
3.0
0.1

9.8

All investments are managed by the investment advisers and Standard Life within the Standard Life “wrap investment” portfolio where the 
investments are held within Dimensional Funds at the year-end. All funds are passively managed. The funds held by the scheme are all 
pooled investment vehicles and therefore the investment manager is responsible for appointing an independent custodian. The objective of 
each of these funds is to match the investment return in a particular investment market subject to an acceptable degree of tracking-error 
that is monitored by the Trustees.

The movement in the present value of defined benefit funding obligations over the year is as follows:

Balance at 1 January 2021
Interest cost on liabilities
Service cost – current accrual cost
Benefits paid – net of member contributions
Actuarial loss/(gain) on change in assumptions

Present value of funded obligations in the balance sheet at 31 December 2021

Membership numbers (active 2021: 12, 2020: 12)

2021 
 £m

10.9
0.1
0.1
(0.2)
(0.5)

10.4

263

2020
 £m

9.9
0.2
0.1
(0.2)
0.9

10.9

263

110

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

16 Retirement benefit net liability continued
The liabilities have been calculated using the following principal actuarial assumptions:

Future increase in inflation rate (RPI)
Future increase in inflation rate (CPI)
Salary increase
Discount rate
Future pension increases for leavers (RPI)

2021

3.30%
2.70%
3.30%
1.90%
3.30%

2020

2.90%
2.30%
2.90%
1.35%
2.90%

Assumptions regarding future mortality experience are set based on actuarial advice in accordance with published statistics and 
experience. Mortality assumptions are based on the following mortality tables: 
•  Pre-retirement mortality: 100% of SAPS “S2” Normal tables
•  Post-retirement mortality: 100% of SAPS “S2” Normal tables

Future improvements in longevity are based on the following:
•  Pre-retirement mortality: CMI 2020 projections with a long-term trend of 0.0% per annum
•  Post-retirement mortality: CMI 2020 projections with a long-term trend of 1.25% per annum

The mortality assumptions used were as follows:

Average expected future life at age 60 for a:
– male currently aged 60
– female currently aged 60
– male currently aged 40
– female currently aged 40

31 Dec 2021 
Years

31 Dec 2020 
Years

27.2
29.4
28.7
30.9

27.1
29.3
28.6
30.8

Members are assumed to retire at the earliest age when there would be no reduction. It is also assumed that members commute 75% of 
the maximum HMRC allowance based on current commutation factors. There are £nil (2020: £nil) contributions unpaid at the year-end.

A charge of £0.1m (2020: £0.1m) is included within the statement of comprehensive income within administrative expenses for the service 
cost. A net actuarial gain, after deferred taxation, of £0.7m (2020: loss of £0.8m) is included within the consolidated statement of 
changes in equity. 

At 31 December 2021, the Company had no pension balances (2020: £nil). 

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

111

17 Trade and other receivables

Trade and other receivables
Amounts due from Group undertakings
Accrued income
Debtors: Amounts falling due after more than one year
Amounts due from Group undertakings

2021 
Group 
£m

103.5
–
12.7

–

116.2

2021 
Company 
£m

–
3.0
–

30.8

33.8

2020 
Group 
£m

89.1
–
15.7

–

104.8

2020 
Company
£m

–
7.7
–

–

7.7

Trade and other receivables are usually due within 30 days and do not bear any effective interest rate. All trade receivables are subject 
to credit risk exposure and the Group maintains a comprehensive credit insurance policy, which mitigates a significant proportion of any 
potential credit risk. The Group does not identify specific concentrations of credit risk with regard to trade and other receivables as the 
amounts recognised represent a large number of receivables from various customers.

The Company has a loan agreement with a subsidiary undertaking, Staffline Recruitment Ltd, for a capital amount of £30.8m. The loan 
is unsecured, is repayable after four years from 30 December 2021 and bears interest at a rate of 4.50% per annum. All other amounts 
due from Group undertakings are non-interest bearing, unsecured and repayable on demand.

The amounts held at 31 December 2021 by the Company pose no material liquidity or credit risk as they are owed by other Group 
undertakings and are expected to be settled by Group transactions.

Included in the trade and other receivables balance above is a bad debt provision of £0.7m (2020: £0.8m). The bad debt provision is split 
as follows:

Expected Credit Loss (“ECL”)
Specific bad debt provision

Bad debt provision

2021
£m

0.1
0.6

0.7

2020
£m

0.1
0.7

0.8

The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to measuring expected credit losses which uses a lifetime expected loss allowance for 
all trade receivables. See note 28 for details.

18 Derivative financial instruments 

Fair value hedge – interest rate cap 

2021 
Group 
£m

0.5

2021 
Company 
£m

0.5

2020 
Group 
£m

–

2020 
Company
£m

–

During the year the Group has entered into an amortising interest rate cap instrument, which reduces exposure to interest rate increases 
above 1% of SONIA on an aggregated two-thirds of the Receivables Finance Agreement and the customer finance arrangements.  
The instrument, which has a term of three years from 13 October 2021, is based on quarterly notional amounts varying between £39.5m 
and £62.5m, with an average of £51.9m. 

The fair values of derivatives are based on market data to calculate the present value of all estimated flows associated with the 
derivatives at the balance sheet date. The interest rate cap is classed as a level 2 financial instrument in accordance with IFRS 13 
classification hierarchy. Level 2 financial instruments are not traded in an active marked, but the fair value is based on quoted market 
prices, broker/dealer quotations, or alternative pricing sources with reasonable levels of price transparency.

112

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

19 Cash

Cash and cash equivalents
Restricted cash

2021 
Group 
£m

29.8
–

2021 
Company
 £m

–
–

2020 
Group 
£m

24.5
0.9

2020 
Company 
£m

–
–

Cash and cash equivalents consist of cash on hand and balances with banks only. All cash on hand and balances with banks are held 
by subsidiary undertakings; however, the balances are available for use by the Group.

Restricted cash related to amounts is held in escrow to satisfy the NMW remediation and financial penalties relating to historic 
HMRC National Minimum Wage breaches. This balance is excluded from net debt.

Long-term credit ratings for the Group’s banks are currently as follows:

Royal Bank of Scotland plc
National Westminster Bank plc
Bank of Ireland Group plc

The Group’s headroom versus available committed bank facilities is as follows:

Cash at bank (as above)
Undrawn receivable finance facility agreement

Banking facility headroom 

As at 31 December 2021, the Company had no cash balances (2020: £nil).

20 Trade and other payables

Trade and other payables
Accruals
Deferred income
Amounts due to Group undertakings
Other taxation and social security 

Fitch

A+
A+
BBB

2021 
Group 
£m

20.4
45.8
14.3
–
53.8

134.3

2021 
Company
 £m

–
–
–
3.4
–

3.4

Standard 
& Poor’s

A
A
BBB–

2021 
£m

29.8
48.6

78.4

2020 
Group  
Restated 
£m

21.0
47.1
6.9
–
80.6

155.6

Moody’s

A1*/A1
A1*/A1
Baa1

2020 
£m

24.5
54.9

79.4

2020 
Company 
£m

–
0.1
–
3.7
–

3.8

The fair value of trade and other payables has not been separately disclosed as, due to their short duration, the Directors consider the 
carrying amounts recognised in the statement of financial position to be a reasonable approximation of their fair value. 

The Group took advantage of the UK Government scheme for the deferral of VAT payments between March and June 2020. The total 
deferral under the scheme amounted to £42.4m after offset of a corporation tax refund due from 2018. The balance was repaid in equal 
instalments between June 2021 and January 2022. As at 31 December 2021, £5.8m remained payable under the arrangement. 

Under certain contracts, the Group’s PeoplePlus division typically receives income in advance of full satisfaction of its performance 
obligations. Such amounts are recorded as deferred income and released as the relevant obligations are fulfilled. During the year the 
division has received contractual amounts due, but due to lock-down restrictions has been unable to provide a full service. 

For 2021, revenue includes £6.9m (2020: £2.6m) included in the contract liability balance at the beginning of the period.

Amounts due to Group undertakings are non-interest bearing, unsecured and repayable on demand.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

113

21 Borrowings
Borrowings are repayable as follows:

In one year or less or on demand*
In more than one year but not more than two years*
In more than two years but not more than five years*
In more than five years
Unamortised refinancing costs

Total borrowings

*  Ageing of balances above is shown excluding unamortised refinancing costs.

Split:
Current liabilities:
Receivables finance agreement
Unamortised refinancing costs
Lease liabilities

Non-current liabilities:
Revolving credit facility
Lease liabilities

Total borrowings

Total borrowings excluding unamortised refinancing costs
Less: Cash (note 19)

Net (cash)/debt

2021 
Group 
£m

24.2
1.1
1.3
0.9
–

27.5

2021 
Company
 £m

–
–
–
–
–

–

2020 
Group 
£m

14.9
21.0
1.3
1.6
(0.3)

38.5

2020 
Company 
£m

–
20.0
–
–
–

20.0

2021 
Group 
£m

2021 
Company
 £m

2020 
Group 
£m

2020 
Company 
£m

22.9
–
1.3

24.2

–
3.3

3.3

27.5

27.5
(29.8)

(2.3)

–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–

–
–

–

13.3
(0.3)
1.6

14.6

20.0
3.9

23.9

38.5

38.8
(24.5)

14.3

–
–
–

–

20.0
–

20.0

20.0

20.0
– 

20.0

Following discussions with its lenders, the Company and the lenders agreed on 26 June 2020 to a revised financing structure. The key 
elements of those facilities was a reduced Revolving Credit Facility (“RCF”) of £30.0m (previously £78.2m) and a new Receivables Finance 
Facility (“RFF”) (invoice discounting) of a maximum of £73.2m, and the removal of the overdraft facility of £25.0m. The refinancing was 
accounted for as a substantial modification.

The key terms of the facilities are set out below: 
i)  Expiry date July 2022;
ii)  Repayment and cancellation of RCF commitments by £10.0m on 31 July 2020; 
iii)   The RFF can initially be drawn down against the receivables of the Recruitment GB division and Northern Ireland, part of the 

Recruitment Ireland division;

iv)  Interest on the RFF accruing at 3.50% plus Bank of England base rate;
v) 

 Minimum EBITDA and minimum liquidity covenants until a return to minimum leverage, interest and asset cover covenants in  
January 2022; and

vi)  No dividends to be declared by the Company until July 2022.

On 31 July 2020, the RCF was reduced by £10.0m from £30.0m to £20.0m. On 8 October 2020, following the removal of two customers 
from the RFF, the maximum availability on the RFF was reduced by £5.0m from £73.2m to £68.2m.

As at 31 December 2020, the Group also had available a separate £25.0m uncommitted, non-recourse, Receivables Financing Facility 
against certain customer receivables, and a number of separate, non-recourse, Customer Financing arrangements whereby specific 
customer invoices are settled in advance of their normal settlement date. The balance funded under the Receivables Financing Facility at  
31 December 2020 was £24.3m and the value of invoices funded under the Customer Financing arrangements was £43.0m. Costs incurred 
in relation to these arrangements are charged to profit and loss as finance charges when incurred.

114

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

21 Borrowings continued
On 10 June 2021, the Group entered into a new Receivables Financing Agreement (“RFA”) to replace the existing Group funding 
arrangements. The RFA contained certain requirements to be met before completion, the most significant of which was that the 
Company raise new equity capital of at least £40.0m. This condition was satisfied and the RFA became effective on 10 June 2021. 

The key terms of the new facility, which is provided jointly by RBS Invoice Finance Limited, ABN AMRO Asset Based Finance N.V., 
UK Branch and Leumi ABL Limited, are set out below:

i)  Maximum receivables financing facility of £90.0m over a four-and-a-half-year term, with a one-year extension option;
ii)  An Accordion option of up to an additional £15.0m, subject to lender approval;
iii)  Security on all of the assets and undertakings of the Company and certain subsidiary undertakings;
iv)   Interest accruing at 2.75% over SONIA, with a margin ratchet downward to 2.0%, dependent upon the Group’s leverage reducing 

to 3.00x;

v)  A non-utilisation fee of 35% of the margin;
vi)   Maximum net debt (averaged over a rolling three months) to EBITDA leverage covenant commencing at 5.95x followed by a gradual 

reduction to 4.0x by October 2023; 

vii)  Minimum interest cover covenant of 2.25x the last 12 months EBITDA to finance charges; and

EBITDA is defined as earnings before interest, taxation, depreciation and amortisation.

The new facility enabled the cancellation of the existing facilities, comprising the RCF of £20.0m and the RFF of £68.2m and also the 
non-recourse Receivables Purchase Facility of £25.0m. The Group retained its Customer Financing arrangements whereby specific 
customer invoices are settled in advance of their normal settlement date. The value of invoices funded under the Customer Financing 
arrangements was £42.3m at 31 December 2021. Costs incurred in relation to these arrangements are charged to profit and loss as 
finance charges when incurred.

For the period to 31 December 2023, the Group’s cash flow forecasts indicate ongoing headroom in the Receivables Finance Agreement 
and also full compliance with the financial covenants described above.

22 Other liabilities

Due after more than one year (non-current)
Other taxation and social security
Retirement benefit net liability
Revolving credit facility termination fee

2021 
Group 
£m

2021 
Company
 £m

2020 
Group 
£m

2020 
Company 
£m

–
0.3
–

0.3

–
–
–

–

5.8
1.1
0.4

7.3

–
–
0.4

0.4

A final instalment of £5.8m relating to the UK Government VAT deferral scheme was paid in January 2022.

The Group has agreed with the trustees of the Group’s defined benefit pension scheme to make additional contributions to the scheme 
in order to eliminate the current deficit by July 2029.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

115

23 Provisions

At 1 January 2021

Amounts charged to the income statement
Amounts transferred from accruals
Amounts utilised
Unused amounts reversed to the income statement

At 31 December 2021

Due within one year (current)
Due after more than one year (non-current)

At 31 December 2021

NMW 
remediation 
and financial 
penalties
 £m

Property 
costs 
£m

2.3

0.1
–
(0.1)
(0.5)

1.8

0.5
1.3

1.8

1.9

–
–
(0.9)
(0.9)

0.1

–
0.1

0.1

Staff 
costs 
£m

0.8

0.4
0.1
(0.4)
–

0.9

0.9
–

0.9

2021 
Group 
Total 
£m

5.0

0.5
0.1
(1.4)
(1.4)

2.8

1.4
1.4

2.8

2020 
Group
 Total
£m

18.4

1.0
0.2
(13.6)
(1.0)

5.0

3.8
1.2

5.0

The Group makes provision staff and property costs relating to reorganisation programmes. The staff costs relate to redundancies and 
the property costs relate to lease dilapidations.

Provision is made for “wear and tear” dilapidations costs at the Group’s leased properties. Where possible, dilapidations provisions are 
determined based on an independent valuation of the estimated total cost payable on expiry of the respective leases. The amounts 
recognised are in respect of “wear and tear” to date. The timing and value of the costs are uncertain due to potential changes to exit 
dates and the final liability which may be subject to negotiation with the landlord. 

The NMW remediation and financial penalties provision relates to historic HMRC National Minimum Wage breaches, of which a large 
proportion was settled in the previous year.

The Company has no provisions (2020: £nil).

24 Deferred taxation

Deferred taxation assets
Deferred taxation (liabilities)

Net asset

The table below shows the Group movement in net deferred taxation during the year: 

2021
Deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

Property, plant, equipment and software temporary timing differences
Acquired intangible assets
Provisions
Recoverable tax losses
Retirement benefit asset

Net asset

Recognised as: 
Deferred tax asset 
Deferred tax liability 

Net asset 

2021 
Group 
£m

4.6
(2.7)

1.9

2021 
Company
 £m

0.8
–

0.8

2020 
Group
£m

4.4
(3.5)

0.9

2020 
Company 
£m

–
–

–

1 January 
2021  
Restated
£m

Recognised in 
comprehensive 
income – 
current year
£m

Recognised in 
comprehensive 
income – 
prior year
£m

31 December 
2021
£m

0.4
(3.0)
0.7
2.6
0.2

0.9

4.4
(3.5)

0.9

0.1
0.3
(0.5)
0.6
(0.1)

0.4

(0.4)
0.8

0.4

(0.3)
–
0.5
0.4
–

0.6

0.6
–

0.6

0.2
(2.7)
0.7
3.6
0.1

1.9

4.6
(2.7)

1.9

116

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

24 Deferred taxation continued
The table below shows the Group movement in net deferred taxation during the prior year: 

2020
Deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

Property, plant, equipment and software temporary timing differences
Acquired intangible assets
Provisions
Recoverable tax losses
Retirement benefit asset

Net (liability)/asset

1 January 
2020  

Restated
£m

Recognised in 
comprehensive 
income – 
current year
£m

Recognised in 
comprehensive 
income – 
prior year
£m

31 December 
2020  

Restated
£m

0.9
(4.7)
0.1
0.4
–

(3.3)

(0.1)
–
–
2.7
–

2.6

(0.4)
1.7
0.6
(0.5)
0.2

1.6

0.4
(3.0)
0.7
2.6
0.2

0.9

The Group has utilised taxable losses against current year taxable profits amounting in aggregate to £4.1m (2020: incurred tax losses 
of £3.2m), during the year and has carried forward tax losses of £16.7m. These losses are available for relief against future tax liabilities. 
The likelihood of recovery of these losses in the foreseeable future is considered to be probable and consequently a deferred tax asset 
has been recognised. Additional tax losses, amounting to £6.6m (2020: £7.3m) whose short-term recoverability is less certain have not 
been recognised as a deferred tax asset. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities in the UK have been recognised at the rate of 25%, whilst those in the Republic of Ireland have been 
recognised at 12.5%. An increase in the UK corporation tax rate from 19% to 25% (effective 1 April 2023) was substantially enacted on 
24 May 2021. This will increase the Group’s future tax charges accordingly. 

Deferred tax net liabilities expected to unwind next year total £1.9m, being the estimated amortisation of intangible assets arising on 
business combinations of £7.5m at a tax rate of 25%.

No deferred tax has been recognised on taxable temporary differences associated with investments as the parent is able to control 
the timing of the reversal of the temporary difference and it is probable that the temporary difference will not reverse in the 
foreseeable future.

25 Share capital

Allotted and issued
165,767,728 ordinary 10p shares

Shares issued and fully paid at the beginning of the year
Shares issued during the year 

Shares issued and fully paid at the end of the year

2021 
£m

16.6

2020 
£m

6.9

2021
Number

2020
Number

68,930,486
96,837,242

68,930,486
–

165,767,728

68,930,486

All Ordinary Shares have the same rights and there are no restrictions on the distribution of dividends or repayment of capital with the 
exception of the 1,140,400 shares held at 31 December 2021 (2020: 1,140,400 shares) by the Employee Benefit Trust where the right to 
dividends has been waived.

The Group announced a proposed Placing, Subscription and Open Offer (the “Fundraise”) on 21 May 2021 following conditional 
agreement of the debt refinancing the previous day. The Fundraise comprised the following elements:
•  A total of 87,249,500 new ordinary shares of 10 pence each placed at a price of 50 pence per share (the “Issue Price”) to certain 

existing shareholders and new institutional investors;

•  A total of 750,500 new ordinary shares of 10 pence each to certain Directors and employees of the Group at the issue price; and
•  An open offer to existing shareholders for 10 shares for every 78 ordinary shares held, for a total of 8,837,242 new ordinary shares of 

10 pence each at the issue price.

The total proceeds of the Fundraise, which was approved by the shareholders in a General Meeting on 9 June 2021, was £48.4m and the 
new ordinary shares were admitted by the London Stock Exchange for trading on AIM on the following day.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

117

26 Related party transactions
Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation and are not 
disclosed in this note.

There were no material transactions with Directors of the Company during the period, except for those relating to remuneration and 
share purchases as noted below.

Transactions with key management personnel

The Group key management personnel’s (defined as the Company’s Directors and divisional senior executives) remuneration, which 
includes the Group Directors’ remuneration disclosed above, is detailed below:

Short-term employee benefits:
Salaries and fees (inc. car allowance)
Bonus – paid at year end
Benefits in kind
Compensation for loss of office
Share-based employee remuneration charge

2021 
£’000

2,508
137
12
–
20

2,677

2020 
£’000

3,899
60
6
163
7

4,135

The emoluments of the highest paid director were £749,000 (2020: £413,000).

Fees for the services of Daniel Quint in 2021 of £40,000, which were paid prior to his appointment as a Director of the Company on  
1 February 2021, are included in both the transactions with Directors and the transactions with key management personnel. The fees 
were paid to the company, Q Finance Limited, of which Daniel is a director. For 2020, the fees for the services of Mr Quint of £413,000, 
which are included in transactions with Directors, and £709,000, which are included in transactions with key management personnel 
were paid to the company Q Finance Limited. The fees paid in 2020 relating to Dawn Ward of £10,000, which are included in both the 
transactions with Directors and the transactions with key management personnel, were paid to Burton and South Derbyshire College,  
of which Dawn Ward is the Chief Executive and Principal.

27 Contingencies
A cross-guarantee exists between the Company and certain subsidiary undertakings for all amounts owing to National Westminster 
Bank plc. The Group aggregate amount owing to National Westminster Bank plc at the year-end was £22.9m (2020: £33.3m).

28 Capital commitments
The Group and Company had no material capital commitments at either 31 December 2021 or 31 December 2020.

29 Risk management objectives and policies
The Group is exposed to a variety of financial risks through its use of financial instruments which result from both its operating and 
investing activities. The Group’s risk management is co-ordinated at its headquarters, in close consultation with the Board of Directors. 

The Group does not actively engage in the trading of financial assets for speculative purposes. The most significant financial risks to 
which the Group is exposed are described below.

Credit risk

Generally, the Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk is limited to the carrying amount of the financial assets (being current assets 
excluding corporation tax recoverable) recognised at the balance sheet date, as summarised below:

Trade and other receivables (note 17):
– held to sell at fair value through the statement of comprehensive income
– held to collect
Cash and cash equivalents (note 18)
Accrued income (note 17)

2021 
Loans and 
receivables 
and balance 
sheet totals 
£m

2020 
Loans and 
receivables 
and balance 
sheet totals 
£m

6.0
97.5
29.8
12.7

146.0

4.3
84.8
24.5
15.7

129.3

118

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

29 Risk management objectives and policies continued
The Group applies the IFRS 9 simplified approach to measuring expected credit losses which uses a lifetime expected loss allowance for 
all trade receivables and contract assets.

To measure the expected credit losses, trade receivables and contract assets have been grouped based on shared credit risk 
characteristics and the days past due. The contract assets relate to unbilled work in progress and have substantially the same risk 
characteristics as the trade receivables for the same types of contracts. The Group has therefore concluded that the expected loss rates 
for trade receivables are a reasonable approximation of the loss rates for the contract assets.

The expected loss rates are based on the payment profiles of sales over a period of 36 months before 31 December 2021 or 31 December 
2020 respectively and the corresponding historical credit losses experienced within this period. The historical loss rates are adjusted to 
reflect current and forward-looking information on macroeconomic factors affecting the ability of the customers to settle the receivables.

31 December 2021

Expected loss rate
Gross carrying amount – trade receivables

Loss allowance

31 December 2020

Expected loss rate
Gross carrying amount – trade receivables

Loss allowance (including specific provisions)

Not more than 
30 days 
past due 
£’000s

0.04%
85,878

34

Not more than 
30 days 
past due 
£’000s

0.04%
75,066

34

>31 days 
past due 
£’000s

0.33%
8,524

28

>31 days
 past due 
£’000s

0.40%
8,238

33

>61 days 
past due 
£’000s

1.06%
1,775

19

>61 days 
past due 
£’000s

2.89%
1,030

30

>91 days 
past due 
£’000s

2.01%
1,322

27

>91 days
 past due
 £’000s

13.27%
287

38

The closing loss allowance for trade receivables as at 31 December 2021 reconciles to the opening loss allowances as follows:

As at 31 December – as previously calculated under IAS 39
Increase in loss allowance recognised in profit or loss during the year

As at 31 December

2021
£m

0.1
–

0.1

Total
 £’000s

97,499

108

Total
 £’000s

84,621

135

2020
£m

0.1
–

0.1

Credit risk is only disclosed in circumstances where the maximum potential loss differs significantly from the financial asset’s 
carrying amount.

The Group’s trade and other receivables are actively monitored to avoid significant concentrations of credit risk. Details in respect of 
trade receivables at 31 December 2021 are provided in note 17. Substantially all of the trade within the PeoplePlus division is with local 
and central government; therefore, the credit risk with these customers is considered low.

The Group has adopted a policy of carefully monitoring all customers, especially those who lack an appropriate credit history.

Liquidity risk

The Group seeks to manage financial risks to ensure sufficient liquidity is available to meet foreseeable needs and to invest cash 
assets safely and profitably. Short-term flexibility is achieved by the use of a new Receivables Finance Agreement of up to £90.0m 
(31 December 2020: £68.2m Receivables Finance Facility and a credit facility of £20.0m). The Receivables Finance Facility and the 
credit facility were repaid in June 2021. As at 31 December 2021, £22.9m of the Receivables Finance Agreement was utilised.

The Group has covenants attached to its banking facilities as described in note 21. For the period to 31 December 2023, the Group’s 
cash flow forecasts indicate ongoing headroom in the Receivables Finance Agreement and also full compliance with the financial 
covenants contained therein. The Group has sufficient day to day liquidity to ensure that short-term liabilities can be satisfied as and 
when they fall due.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

119

Maturity of financial liabilities

The analysis of the maturity of financial liabilities due in less than one year is as follows:

2021  
Less than one 
month  
£m

2021  
Between 1 and 
3 months  
£m

2021   
Between 3 and 
12 months  
£m

Receivables finance 
agreement
Revolving credit facility
Lease liabilities
Trade and other payables
Accruals

Total

7.6
–
0.1
18.8
24.8

43.7

15.3
–
0.3
1.6
8.4

10.3

–
–
0.9
–
12.6

13.5

2021  
Total  
£m

22.9
–
1.3
20.4
45.8

67.5

2020  
Less than  
one month  

2020  
Between 1 and 3 
months  

£m

–
–
0.2
17.2
25.5

42.9

£m

–
–
0.4
1.5
8.6

10.5

2020   

Between 3 and 
12 months 
 £m

–
–
1.0
–
13.0

14.0

The analysis of the maturity of financial liabilities at 31 December 2021 is as follows:

Receivables finance 
agreement
Revolving credit facility
Lease liabilities
Trade and other payables
Accruals

Total

2021 
Less than 
one year 
£m

2021 
One to 
five years 
£m

2021
 More than 
five years 
£m

22.9
–
1.3
20.4
45.8

90.4

–
–
2.4
–
–

2.4

–
–
0.9
–
–

0.9

2021 
Total 
£m

22.9
–
4.6
20.4
45.8

93.7

2020 
Less than 
one year
£m

2020 
One to 
five years 
£m

2020
More than 
five years 
£m

–
–
1.6
18.7
47.1

67.4

–
20.0
2.3
–
–

22.3

–
–
1.6
–
–

1.6

2020   
Total  
£m

–
–
1.6
18.7
47.1

67.4

2020 
Total
£m

–
20.0
5.5
18.7
47.1

91.3

The accruals figure includes £13.1m (2020: £14.4m) of employee obligations, which are not within the scope of IFRS7, but have been 
included to provide additional information.

The analysis of the maturity of contractual undiscounted financial liabilities (including estimated future interest) at 31 December 2021 is 
as follows:

2021 
Less than 
one year 
£m

2021 
One to 
five years 
£m

2021
 More than 
five years 
£m

23.0
–
1.4
20.4
45.8

90.6

–
–
2.5
–
–

2.5

–
–
1.0
–
–

1.0

2021 
Total 
£m

23.0
–
4.9
20.4
45.8

94.1

2020 
Less than 
one year
£m

2020 
One to 
five years 
£m

2020 
More than 
five years 
£m

–
–
1.7
18.7
47.1

67.5

–
21.1
2.5
–
–

23.6

–
–
1.7
–
–

1.7

2020 
Total
£m

–
21.1
5.9
18.7
47.1

92.8

Receivables finance 
agreement
Revolving credit facility
Lease liabilities
Trade and other payables
Accruals

Total

Interest rate risk 

During the year the Group has entered into an amortising interest rate cap instrument, which reduces exposure to interest rate increases 
above 1% of SONIA on an aggregated two-thirds of the Receivables Finance Agreement and the customer finance arrangements. 
The instrument, which has a term of three years from 13 October 2021, had an initial notional amount of £53.9m. This amount varies 
quarterly based on forecast borrowings between £39.5m and £62.5m, with an average of £51.9m. The following table illustrates the 
sensitivity of the net result for the year and equity to a reasonably possible increase in interest rates of one percentage point with effect 
from the beginning of the year.

Decrease in net result and equity (£m)

2021

+1%
(0.6)

2020

+1%
(0.6)

120

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

29 Risk management objectives and policies continued
Hedge accounting 

In order to qualify for hedge accounting, the Group is required to document the economic relationship between the item being hedged 
and the hedging instrument in advance. The Group is also required to demonstrate that the hedge will be effective on an ongoing basis. 
Effectiveness testing of the interest rate cap instrument was demonstrated at inception and at the year-end. Further testing will be 
undertaken periodically to ensure that the hedge remains effective. Potential sources of ineffectiveness include the timing of weekly and 
monthly interest payments versus the quarterly periods of the interest rate cap and a difference in the interest rate basis specified in a 
small part of the hedged item. Neither of these items give rise to material hedge ineffectiveness.

Foreign currency sensitivity

Most of the Group’s transactions are carried out in sterling. Exposure to currency exchange rates arises from the Group’s overseas sales 
and purchases which are predominantly denominated in Euro (Republic of Ireland and Portugal). The Group has not entered into any 
foreign currency risk mitigation strategies to date. This will be kept under review.

Financial liabilities

The Group’s liabilities (being total liabilities excluding deferred tax liabilities) are classified as follows:

Receivables Finance Agreement 
Lease liabilities
Trade and other payables
Accruals
Deferred income
Other liabilities
Taxation and social security
Provisions

Total

2021 
Financial
 liabilities 
at fair value 
through profit 
or loss 
£m

2021 
Other 
financial 
liabilities 
 at amortised 
cost 
£m

2021 
Liabilities not 
within the 
scope of IFRS 9 
£m

2021 
Balance
 sheet total 
£m

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

22.9
4.6
20.4
45.8
–
–
–
–

93.7

–
–
–
–
14.3
0.3
53.8
2.8

71.2

22.9
4.6
20.4
45.8
14.3
0.3
53.8
2.8

164.9

It is considered that the fair value of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities equal the book value.

Revolving credit facility 
Receivables Finance Facility
Lease liabilities
Trade and other payables
Accruals
Deferred income
Other liabilities
Taxation and social security
Provisions

Total

2020 
Financial
 liabilities at fair 
value through 
profit or loss 
£m

2020 
Other financial 
liabilities at 
amortised cost  
Restated 
£m

2020 
Liabilities not 
within the scope 
of IFRS 9 
£m

2020 
Balance
 sheet total 
Restated 
£m

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–

20.0
13.3
5.5
21.0
47.1
–
0.4
–
–

107.3

–
–
–
–
–
6.9
1.1
86.2
5.0

99.2

20.0
13.3
5.5
21.0
47.1
6.9
1.5
86.2
5.0

206.5

Fair value represents amounts at which an asset could be exchanged, or a liability settled on an arm’s length basis. 

Financial assets and financial liabilities measured at fair value are grouped into three levels of fair value hierarchy. This grouping is 
determined based on the lowest level of significant inputs used in the fair value measurement, as follows:
• 
• 

level 1 – quoted prices in active markets for identical assets and liabilities;
level 2 – inputs other than quoted prices included in level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly or 
indirectly; and
level 3 – inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

• 

The Group has no financial assets or liabilities in any of the above classifications.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

121

30 Cash flows from operating activities – consolidated
Reconciliation of loss before taxation to net cash (outflow)/inflow from operating activities

Loss before taxation from:
Continuing operations
Discontinued operations

Adjustments for:
Finance costs
Depreciation and amortisation – underlying
Amortisation – non-underlying
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Impairment of goodwill

Cash generated before changes in working capital and share options
Change in trade and other receivables
Change in trade, other payables and provisions
Impact of foreign exchange loss on operating activities

Cash (used by)/generated from operations

Employee equity-settled share options

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from operating activities

Movement in net debt

Net debt at 1 January (excluding refinancing costs)

Loan repayments
Net drawdowns from Receivables Finance Agreement
Lease payments, additions, disposals and interest
Change in cash and cash equivalents

Net debt at 31 December (excluding refinancing costs)

Represented by:
Cash and cash equivalents (note 18)
Current borrowings (note 20)
Lease liabilities (note 15)
Non-current borrowings (note 20)

Net cash/(debt) including refinancing costs

Refinancing costs (unamortised balance)

Net cash/(debt) at 31 December (excluding refinancing costs)

2021 
£m

(0.1)
(0.4)

(0.5)

2.4
6.3
8.0
0.3
–

16.5
(12.2)
(33.1)
–

(28.8)

0.1

(28.7)

2021 
£m

(14.3)

20.0
(9.6)
0.9
5.3

2.3

29.8
(22.9)
(4.6)
–

2.3

–

2.3

2020
£m

(51.6)
(5.0)

(56.6)

7.3
7.4
9.2
0.8
35.3

3.4
27.6
34.6
0.1

65.7

0.1

65.8

2020 
£m

(67.9)

58.1
(13.3)
2.9
5.9

(14.3)

24.5
(13.0)
(5.5)
(20.0)

(14.0)

(0.3)

(14.3)

122

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Notes to the Financial Statements continued
for the year ended 31 December 2021

30 Cash flows from operating activities – consolidated continued
The movements in net debt, excluding refinancing costs, can be further summarised as follows:

Net debt as at 1 January 2020
Cash flows during the year
Non-cash movements in leases

Net debt at 31 December 2020

Cash flows during the year
Non-cash movements in leases

Net cash/(debt) at 31 December 2021

Overdrafts
 £m

Lease liabilities 
£m

Revolving credit 
facility
 £m

Receivables 
Finance  
Agreement 
£m

Movements  
from financing 
activities
£m

(6.4)
6.4
–

–

–
–

–

(8.4)
3.1
(0.2)

(5.5)

1.7
(0.8)

(4.6)

(78.1)
58.1
–

(20.0)

20.0
–

–

–
(13.3)
–

(13.3)

(9.6)
–

(22.9)

(92.9)
54.3
(0.2)

(38.8)

12.2
(0.9)

(27.5)

Cash
 £m

25.0
(0.5)
–

24.5

5.3
–

29.8

Total 
£m

(67.9)
53.8
(0.2)

(14.3)

17.5
(0.9)

2.3

31 Acquisition of businesses – cash paid, net of cash acquired
Cash flows in relation to the acquisitions made during 2018 are as follows:

Consideration paid

Acquisition of businesses per cash flow – investing activities
Debt facilities acquired – financing activities

Acquisition of businesses 

2021 
Total
acquisitions 
£m

2020 
Total 
acquisitions 
£m

–

–
–

–

0.3

0.3
–

0.3

32 Capital management policies and procedures
The Board’s current priorities for the Group’s free cash flow are to fund Group development and maintain the strength of the statement 
of financial position. The Group’s overall strategy remains unchanged from last year in that it manages its capital to ensure that the 
Group will be able to continue as a going concern through the economic cycle.

The capital structure of the Group consists of net debt, which is represented by cash and cash equivalents (note 19), bank borrowings 
(note 21) and equity attributable to equity holders of the parent, comprising issued share capital, reserves and retained earnings as 
disclosed in the consolidated statement of changes in equity. 

The only restrictions on the Group’s capital relates to the certain undertakings and covenants attached to the debt facilities.

The Group has covenants attached to its banking facilities. Following the June 2021 refinancing, the main financial covenants are 
minimum net debt to EBITDA leverage and interest cover as described in note 20.

33 Changes in accounting policies
There were no new accounting pronouncements requiring adoption in the year. During the year the Group adopted a new accounting 
policy relating to the treatment of hedged financial instruments, as set out in note 3. 

34 Post balance sheet events
There were no events between the balance sheet date of 31 December 2021 and the approval of these accounts on 21 March 2022,  
that are required to be brought to the attention of shareholders.

Strategic Report

Governance

Financial Statements

123

Staffline Group plc
Unaudited five-year summary of financial data

Comprehensive income
Turnover
Underlying operating profit
% margin
Operating profit/(loss)
Net profit/(loss) after taxation
Underlying earnings/(loss) per share (diluted) 
Declared dividend per share 
Dividend cover v underlying diluted EPS

Financial position

Goodwill
Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Restricted cash
Trade and other payables
Borrowings (excluding deal fees)
Lease liabilities (IFRS 16)
Deferred tax net asset/(liability)
Other (net liabilities)

Net assets

Net cash/(debt), pre-IFRS 16, excluding deal fees

Goodwill, intangibles

Other net (liabilities)/assets

Cash flows

Underlying operating (loss)/profit
Loss on discontinued activities
Non-underlying cash costs
Depreciation, amortisation
Working capital movements
Capital expenditure, including software
Taxation received/(paid) (net)

Adjusted free cash from operations

Dividends and interest paid
Business acquisitions including debt acquired
Payment into restricted fund
Issue of share capital (net)
Others 

Reduction/(increase) in net debt

Financial reporting years ended 31 December £m

2020
Restated

2019
Restated

2018

2017

2021

942.7
10.3
1.1%
2.3
1.2
7.1p
n/a
n/a

59.6
16.5
8.0
117.3
29.8
–
(134.3)
(22.9)
(4.6)
1.9
(3.1)

68.2

6.9

76.1

927.6
4.8
0.5%
(44.3)
(52.7)
5.0p
n/a
n/a

59.6
24.3
9.6
106.5
24.5
0.9
(155.6)
(33.0)
(5.5)
0.9
(12.3)

19.9

(8.8)

83.9

(14.8)

(55.2)

10.3
(0.4)
–
6.6
(45.1)
(4.4)
5.8

(27.2)

(1.9)
–
–
46.4
(11.8)

5.5

4.8
(5.0)
(4.5)
8.2
62.2
(2.4)
(0.5)

62.8

(8.5)
(0.3)
–
–
0.1

54.1

1,063.0
0.6
0.1%
(38.5)
(46.3)
(7.4)p
n/a
n/a

94.9
34.0
14.6
137.7
25.0
12.7
(128.7)
(84.5)
(8.4)
(3.3)
(20.5)

73.5

(59.5)

128.9

4.1

0.6
(3.7)
(5.7)
7.3
3.1
(5.1)
(1.1)

(4.6)

(6.0)
(7.2)
(12.7)
38.0
–

7.5

1,120.9
32.8
2.9%
(14.7)
(16.0)
88.3p
11.3p
n/a

117.2
42.9
7.6
159.5
16.2
–
(143.4)
(80.0)
–
(5.8)
(31.4)

82.8

(63.8)

160.1

(13.2)

32.8
–
(30.2)
4.8
12.8
(6.4)
(6.4)

7.4

(9.8)
(49.6)
–
5.0
–

(47.0)

957.8
38.0
4.0%
25.8
17.5
108.3p
26.7p
4.1x

94.2
20.8
7.7
107.7
31.3
–
(103.4)
(48.1)
–
(2.1)
(14.2)

93.9

(16.8)

115.0

(4.3)

38.0
–
–
4.4
5.5
(3.8)
(6.2)

37.9

(9.3)
(8.5)
–
0.3
–

20.4

124

Staffline Group plc Annual Report and Accounts 2021

Company Details

Company registration number:
05268636

Bankers:
RBS Invoice Finance Limited

Registered office:
19–20 The Triangle
NG2 Business Park
Nottingham
NG2 1AE

Directors:
Ian Lawson (Non-Executive Chairman)
Albert Ellis (Chief Executive Officer)
Daniel Quint (Chief Financial Officer)
Richard Thomson (Senior Independent Non-Executive Director)
Ian Starkey (Non-Executive Director)
Catherine Lynch (Non-Executive Director)
Tom Spain (Non-Executive Director)

Secretary:
Louise Barber FCG

Company website:
www.stafflinegroupplc.co.uk

Investor relations contact details:
investors@staffline.co.uk

Nominated adviser and broker:
Liberum Capital

Ropemaker Place
25 Ropemaker Street
London
EC2Y 9LY

Registrars:
Computershare Investor Services plc

PO Box 859
The Pavilions
Bridgewater Road
Bristol
BS99 1XZ 

250 Bishopsgate
London
EC2M 4AA

National Westminster Bank plc

City of London Office
1 Princes Street
London
EC2R 8BP

ABN AMRO Asset Based Finance N.V. UK Branch

5 Aldermanbury Square
London
EC2V 7HR

Leumi ABL Limited

1 Angel Court
London
EC2R 7HJ

Bank of Ireland Group plc

40 Mespil Road
Dublin 4
Republic of Ireland

Solicitors:
DLA Piper UK LLP

160 Aldersgate Street
London
EC1A 4HT

Statutory auditors:
Grant Thornton UK LLP

Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors
30 Finsbury Square
London
EC2A 1AG

Financial and trade public relations:
Vigo Consulting Limited

Sackville House 
40 Piccadilly 
London
W1J 0DR

Designed 
Visit us at emperor.works 

and produced 

by emperor /( 

�...._' 

Registered office
19–20 The Triangle
NG2 Business Park
Nottingham, NG2 1AE